第一篇：新版(外研版)四年級(jí)英語(yǔ)上冊(cè)全教案

《英語(yǔ)》(新標(biāo)準(zhǔn))（三起）第三冊(cè) Module 1 Unit 1 Go straight on.一、準(zhǔn)備階段: Ⅰ 教學(xué)目標(biāo): 情感目標(biāo)：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生樂(lè)于助人的品質(zhì)。

知識(shí)目標(biāo)：學(xué)習(xí)句型Where’s West Lake Road, please? Go straight on.Turn left.Turn right.Where are you going? 能力目標(biāo)：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生問(wèn)路、指路的能力。Ⅱ 教學(xué)重點(diǎn);1.學(xué)習(xí)句型：Where’s ?,please? Go straight on.Turn left.Turn right.Where are you going? 2.掌握單詞及詞組：house/ go straight on/ turn left/ turn right/excuse me/ next to/ supermarket Ⅲ 教學(xué)難點(diǎn):

掌握表示地點(diǎn)和方位的詞

Ⅳ 輔助資源：

掛圖、錄音機(jī)、磁帶、圖片、課文VCD

二、教學(xué)過(guò)程: I.Warming up TPR活動(dòng)。教師邊說(shuō)邊做：”Right hand up.Right hand down.”學(xué)生跟著教師邊做邊說(shuō)。II.Revision: 教師出示一些表示地點(diǎn)的圖片如park/zoo/shop/school等，請(qǐng)學(xué)生搶答出單詞。（通過(guò)復(fù)習(xí)地點(diǎn)單詞為練習(xí)本課的句型Where’s ?,please?做好鋪墊。）III.Presentation: 1.教師拿出公園的圖片對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)：”I’m going to the park this weekend.Where are you going this weekend?”學(xué)生說(shuō)出自己的出行計(jì)劃”I’m going to?.”（為課文教學(xué)創(chuàng)設(shè)情景）2.教師說(shuō)：”Sam is going to Daming’s house.Where is Daming’s house? Is it in West Lake Road or East Lake Road? Let’s wactch the VCD.” 3.學(xué)生觀看課文VCD，找出答案并回答。4.教師提問(wèn)：”Sam asks the way to the policeman.How does he ask?”學(xué)生聽(tīng)課文錄音，大屏幕上出示Sam的問(wèn)話(huà)。教師指導(dǎo)學(xué)生讀句子。

5.所有學(xué)生來(lái)扮演Sam,教師來(lái)扮演policeman，同時(shí)在大屏幕上演示出課文中的路線圖，教師邊指圖邊講解。教授詞組go straight on/turn left/ turn right。

6.教師在大屏幕上出示幾種路線圖如：

讓學(xué)生說(shuō)出路線。

（通過(guò)練習(xí)及時(shí)操練重點(diǎn)詞組。）

7.學(xué)生打開(kāi)書(shū)，跟錄音朗讀課文。8.分角色朗讀課文。IV.Practice: 1.活動(dòng)：?jiǎn)柭贰?/p>

讓學(xué)生自己畫(huà)一幅地圖，上面有三條路，分別標(biāo)有school/ zoo/ supermarket/ my house.在地圖的某處標(biāo)有You’re here.教師請(qǐng)學(xué)生用自己的地圖進(jìn)行兩人小組練習(xí)，一人問(wèn)路：”Where’s the zoo, please?”，另一人指路:”Go straight on and then turn left”。

（此活動(dòng)目的在于鞏固練習(xí)問(wèn)路及指路的語(yǔ)句，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生觀察和動(dòng)手能力。）2.活動(dòng)：我迷路了。

教師準(zhǔn)備一些路線圖和要找的目的地單詞卡。教師將單詞卡片發(fā)給一些學(xué)生，再將路線圖發(fā)給另一部分學(xué)生，那單詞卡片的學(xué)生作為迷路者來(lái)問(wèn)路，如：”I’m lost.Where’s the park?”拿著路線圖的學(xué)生幫助他們來(lái)指路。（學(xué)生在活動(dòng)中操練了問(wèn)路和指路。）V.Summary:

教師說(shuō)：”Today we have learned how to ask and show the way with Where’s ?, please? Go straight on.Turn left.Turn right.” We use them in the daily life.VI Homework

請(qǐng)學(xué)生畫(huà)出從家到學(xué)校的路線圖并英語(yǔ)標(biāo)注。

Module 1 Unit2 It’s at the station.教學(xué)設(shè)計(jì)

一、教學(xué)目標(biāo) ：

1、知識(shí)目標(biāo)：學(xué)習(xí)單詞： station, houses, hill, train, up, down, near

學(xué)習(xí)句子： Where’s train 1?The train is up/down the hill.2、能力目標(biāo)：能聽(tīng)說(shuō)、認(rèn)讀單詞 station,houses,hill,train,up,down

能運(yùn)用句子 It’s at the station, 來(lái)描述位置。

3、情感目標(biāo)：通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)本課知識(shí)，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生禮貌，熱心，樂(lè)于助人的好習(xí)慣。

二、教學(xué)重難點(diǎn) ：

重點(diǎn)：認(rèn)讀單詞 station,houses,hill,train 和理解方位介詞 up,down,near,at 難點(diǎn)：運(yùn)用句子 It’s at the station.描述位置

三、教具 ：課件，卡片，錄音機(jī)

四、教學(xué)過(guò)程 ： Step1 ： Warm--up

1、Greeting

2、I say you do:stand up,sit down,boys up,girls up,boys and girls down.Show me your hands,right hand,left hand

Show me your feet,left foot,right foot

3、Chant:Left hand,right hand,left hand, right

Go straight on ,now turn right

Left foot, right foot, left foot, right

Go straignt on, now turn left Step 2:Presentation 1、(課件展示一只小狗)T:What’s this?

Ss:It’s a dog.T:Yes,his name is doudou.We know,doudou is lost.Where is doudou live? Ss:NO.2 West Lake Road.T: now let’s help doudou to find his home.、動(dòng)畫(huà)課件展示街道和幾處掩藏的建筑（station，hill，houses），通過(guò) guessing方式，首先展示 station，doudou 乘 train 從 station 出發(fā)，來(lái)到 hill,up the hill and down the hill 之后，來(lái)到 houses，即 doudou’s home.課件展示移動(dòng)的 doudou.Ss 根據(jù) doudou 的路徑 say:Go straight on,then turn left T:doudou stop here,where is it? Is this doudou’home? Ss guess yes or no T:let’s have a look.T 點(diǎn)擊出現(xiàn) station, 板書(shū)并教授此單詞。T:what’s station? Bus station?let’s listen(點(diǎn)擊 train 聲音),It’s a train station.板書(shū)教授 train,(區(qū)別 train and tree, 著重強(qiáng)調(diào) train 的發(fā)音)train 靠站，T ： where is the train?(板書(shū))Ss:it’s at the station.T:Doudou gets on the train,and go on,the train stop again,maybe it’s doudou’s home.let’s see.No, what’s this?(點(diǎn)擊出示 hill 并教授),train 上山然后下山，通過(guò)動(dòng)畫(huà)教授 up the hill ,down the hill.T:this time the train stop here,what happened? 點(diǎn)擊出現(xiàn) house, 通過(guò) how 來(lái)教授 house.T: this is doudou’s home,NO2.West LakeRoad.Where is NO2.West LakeRoad?(點(diǎn)擊出現(xiàn) supermarket)It’s next to the supermarket.通過(guò) next to 導(dǎo)出 near, 通過(guò) ear 幫助學(xué)生掌握 near 的發(fā)音。

3.T:we help doudou find his home.There are four trains here,train1,train2,train3and train4,where’s the trains?listen and answer.(1)listen and point(2)listen and answer(3)listen and repeat Step3 practice 1.T:there is a new friend here,monkey.where is the monkey? 通過(guò) monkey 的運(yùn)動(dòng)，依次做出回答，It’s up the tree/down the tree/near the houses/at the zoo 2.look,read and write on

up

near

at

down 1.The bus is ____ the hill.2.The tiger is ___ the tree.3.The cat is ____ the house.4.The car is _____ the hill.5.The car is ____ the zoo.Step4: sum up Step5 :Homework 畫(huà)一幅你家附近的地圖，用英語(yǔ)向朋友介紹怎樣到達(dá)某地

Module 2 Unit 1 She’s reading a book.教學(xué)目標(biāo)：

1、全體學(xué)生能理解：read, running, these, picture, take, take pictures

2、全體學(xué)生能運(yùn)用：

語(yǔ)法：She’s reading a book.He’s taking pictures.詞匯：reading, running, taking, taking pictures

3、學(xué)會(huì)談?wù)搱D片上正在發(fā)生的事情。

教學(xué)重點(diǎn)：

1、談?wù)搱D片上正在發(fā)生的事情。

2、掌握單詞：reading, running, taking, taking pictures, 教學(xué)難點(diǎn)： 談?wù)搱D片上正在發(fā)生的事情。

教具學(xué)具： 多媒體課件，照片，單詞卡片，小盒子 教學(xué)過(guò)程 教學(xué)反饋 Step 1 Warm up and lead in

1.Greeting.2.Read the chant of last module together.3.Show some pictures and ask the students to say something about the pictures.(展示一些照片，讓學(xué)生看著照片說(shuō)說(shuō)照片上的人分別喜歡什么運(yùn)動(dòng)以及在做什么運(yùn)動(dòng)。對(duì)于照片上的人正在進(jìn)行的活動(dòng)學(xué)生不會(huì)表達(dá)的可以用中文來(lái)說(shuō)。用中文來(lái)說(shuō)了之后，詢(xún)問(wèn)學(xué)生同樣的內(nèi)容我們?nèi)绻糜⒄Z(yǔ)來(lái)表達(dá)又該怎么說(shuō)呢？學(xué)了這一課之后我們就可以用英語(yǔ)來(lái)表達(dá)了。)Step 2 Presentation

1.Learn the new words

Before we learn the new text, we learn some new words: these, reading, taking pictures, watching TV, playing with a toy train.(1)出示單詞卡片，通過(guò)集體跟讀，小組跟讀，開(kāi)火車(chē)類(lèi)型活動(dòng)讓學(xué)生會(huì)讀新單詞。

（2）聽(tīng)音做動(dòng)作。老師讀一個(gè)單詞，學(xué)生根據(jù)單詞做出相應(yīng)的動(dòng)作。2．Listening(1)Play the tape, and ask the students to listen carefully.第一次播放錄音，請(qǐng)學(xué)生看圖，理解課文語(yǔ)境。

(2)Listen again and ask the students to point to the sentences and find “-ing”并圈出來(lái)。

第二次播放錄音，可以讓學(xué)生指著課文的句子默默跟讀，找出帶有“-ing”的單詞。

(3)Listen for the third times and ask the students to repeat the sentences.Try to imitate the tone and the pronunciation.播放第三次錄音，讓學(xué)生跟著錄音讀，盡量模仿錄音的語(yǔ)音和語(yǔ)調(diào)。

3、重點(diǎn)學(xué)習(xí)：She’s reading a book.He’s taking pictures.向?qū)W生展示一個(gè)小女孩看書(shū)的圖片，跟學(xué)生說(shuō)假設(shè)是我的照片，說(shuō)明圖片內(nèi)容并板書(shū)：

I like reading.Look, I’m reading a book.帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)以上語(yǔ)句，說(shuō)明照片的內(nèi)容。

再展示一個(gè)男孩和一個(gè)女孩看書(shū)的圖片，分別說(shuō)明圖片內(nèi)容并板書(shū)：

Lily likes reading.Look!She’s reading a book.Tom likes reading.Look!He’s reading a book.帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)以上的句子，說(shuō)明圖片內(nèi)容。

（板書(shū)的時(shí)候用不同顏色的筆呈現(xiàn)助動(dòng)詞“be”和實(shí)義動(dòng)詞的現(xiàn)在分詞。）4.Practice

(1)Ask the students to look at the pictures on Page 10 and listen to the tape, and then repeat the sentences.(2)Take out a magic box.Ask the students to take a picture from the box and describe the picture.讓學(xué)生從盒子中抽出圖片，然后根據(jù)圖片的內(nèi)容，用本節(jié)課所學(xué)知識(shí)去描述圖片。

Look at the pictures on Page10 and try to describe the pictures.讓學(xué)生看圖片說(shuō)出盼盼的活動(dòng)。

然后請(qǐng)學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行訓(xùn)練，一人按照?qǐng)D片做動(dòng)作，另一人說(shuō)句子，然后交換角色開(kāi)展活動(dòng)。最后請(qǐng)部分學(xué)生進(jìn)行展示。Step 4 Summary

Sum up what we learnt during this period.Review the words: these, reading, taking pictures, watching TV, playing with a toy train.And review the sentences: She’s reading a book.He’s taking pictures.She’s watching TV.He’s playing with a toy train.Step 5 Homework

1.Listen to the tape and repeat the text for several times.（注意模仿錄音的語(yǔ)音和語(yǔ)調(diào)。）

2.Copy the text with the translation.(注意單詞的書(shū)寫(xiě)格式。)板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì) Module 2 Unit 1 She’s reading a book.reading

She’s reading a book.running

He’s taking pictures.taking taking pictures 教學(xué)反思

課題 Module 2Unit 2 What are you doing? 課型 新授課 教學(xué)目標(biāo) 1．知識(shí)學(xué)習(xí)：句型： 1)---What are you doing?---I ' m ? 2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is ?

2．習(xí)慣養(yǎng)成：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生積極主動(dòng)的學(xué)習(xí)態(tài)度，能大膽開(kāi)口，積極參與各項(xiàng)學(xué)習(xí)活動(dòng)，善于與同學(xué)交流。

3.能力培養(yǎng)：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生用英語(yǔ)進(jìn)行交流，養(yǎng)成用英語(yǔ)思維的良好習(xí)慣，提高學(xué)生的創(chuàng)造力和實(shí)踐能力。

4.品德培養(yǎng)：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生團(tuán)結(jié)合作的精神，養(yǎng)成良好的文明習(xí)慣。教學(xué)重點(diǎn)難點(diǎn) 重點(diǎn)：1)---What are you doing?---I ' m ? 2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is ? 難點(diǎn)：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生用英語(yǔ)進(jìn)行交流，養(yǎng)成用英語(yǔ)思維的良好習(xí)慣，提高學(xué)生的創(chuàng)造力和實(shí)踐能力。教學(xué)方法 直觀演示幫助理解。師生活動(dòng)過(guò)程 設(shè)計(jì)意圖 1． Warm—up a.Greeting b.Ask and Answer復(fù)習(xí)上節(jié)課學(xué)過(guò)的內(nèi)容，出示掛圖根據(jù)掛圖的內(nèi)容,說(shuō)出句子,可找個(gè)人說(shuō),或小組代表,或集體說(shuō).2.Leading-up a.找同學(xué)做動(dòng)作,其他同學(xué)介紹他在做什么? b.同學(xué)做動(dòng)作.老師問(wèn)What are you doing?多說(shuō)幾遍,找同學(xué)回答,然后讓學(xué)生試著說(shuō) What are you doing?可以師生問(wèn)答,或生生問(wèn)答.掌握好之后變換人稱(chēng)What is he /she doing ?三人一小組進(jìn)行練習(xí).學(xué)習(xí)新單詞 listen to ,music, read ,掌握詞組listen to music, read a book,根據(jù)卡片練習(xí)句子I’m listening to music /reading a book./ watchingTV, 3.情景操練

根據(jù)上節(jié)課學(xué)過(guò)及新學(xué)的詞組,句型同桌練習(xí)，或者小組練習(xí).根據(jù)圖片或者動(dòng)作進(jìn)行對(duì)話(huà)練習(xí):如: What are you doing? I’m listening to music 4．課文學(xué)習(xí)

大家看一下Sam的一家在忙什么,（1）Listen and point.播放錄音，主要培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的認(rèn)讀能力，至少聽(tīng)兩遍。（2）Listen and repeat.再次撥放錄音，學(xué)生邊指邊讀。(3)小組對(duì)話(huà)練習(xí).分角色朗讀.練習(xí)2,point and say

對(duì)話(huà)練習(xí): What is sam doing? He ’s listening to music 同桌問(wèn)答.找同學(xué)起來(lái)說(shuō).練習(xí)3.Act it out.What is he /she doing ?的問(wèn)答.找同學(xué)到講臺(tái)上每一個(gè)人做一個(gè)動(dòng)作不動(dòng).其他同學(xué)進(jìn)行問(wèn)答.練習(xí)5 仍舊是對(duì)正在進(jìn)行的動(dòng)作進(jìn)行描述.鞏固練習(xí).也可以采取you say I do ,you do I say ,you say I draw等形式.Module3 Unit 1

What are they doing? 教學(xué)案例

教學(xué)內(nèi)容

外研社新標(biāo)準(zhǔn)小學(xué)英語(yǔ)（三年級(jí)起）第三冊(cè) Module 4 Unit 1 教學(xué)重點(diǎn)、難點(diǎn)

重點(diǎn)：

(1)學(xué)習(xí)并掌握單詞學(xué)詞語(yǔ)Let’s get on lots of interesting thing look at

people park lake row boat men chess drink hungry

(2)句型：What are they doing? They are doing sth.難點(diǎn)：學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用What are they doing? They are doing sth..教學(xué)方法

情景教學(xué)法：利用多媒體幫助學(xué)生直觀理解，利用圖片展開(kāi)口語(yǔ)對(duì)話(huà)，設(shè)置真實(shí)情景引出新內(nèi)容。

游戲教學(xué)法：運(yùn)用游戲讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行鞏固性操練和擴(kuò)展性操練，增加操練的趣味。

教學(xué)準(zhǔn)備

多媒體課件，單詞卡片

教學(xué)過(guò)程

教學(xué)過(guò)程：

Step 1: Warming up(熱身)

T: Read the passage that we have learnt in the last module.（復(fù)習(xí)上個(gè)Unit的知識(shí)，溫故知新。）

Step 2: Presentation(呈現(xiàn))

1、詞句呈現(xiàn)（1）T：Let’s get on the bus.Do you know “Let’s”? For example, let’s run, let’s sing and let’s dance.讓我們一起跑步，一起唱歌，一起跳舞。(板書(shū)Let’s,并教讀這一短語(yǔ)和上述句子。)（2）T: Oh, the bus is coming, let’s get on the bus.(由此讓生理解get on的意思。)

教讀get on the bus（用get up換詞為get on,以舊帶新，降低難度。）

（3）T：Now, let’s get on the bus and go to the park.Do you know “park”?教park這一單詞。

（4）T：In the park, we can see lots of interesting things.教“l(fā)ots of”.（創(chuàng)設(shè)情境，進(jìn)入一個(gè)整體的情景學(xué)習(xí)相關(guān)的詞句。）

（5）T：In the park, we can see monkeys, snakes, they are interesting things.(教interesting things)Let’s see some interesting things in the park.（6）出示課件。

T: Guess.What are they doing?他們?cè)谧鍪裁矗?/p>

Ss：劃船。

T：They are rowing a dragon boat.教row, boat 和row a boat以及復(fù)習(xí)dragon。(運(yùn)用TPR進(jìn)行教學(xué)。)

（7）出示課件：Look at the people.(教look at, people.TPR，結(jié)合圖片教學(xué))

T: I am look at you.We are people.T:Guess.What are they doing?

Ss：打太極。

T：They are doing Taijiquan.(文中這一句沒(méi)有新詞，所以用這一句來(lái)鞏固所教的新句型，可使難度降低。)

T：你在做什么？我們可以說(shuō)“What are you doing?”那‵他們?cè)谧鍪裁?？′怎樣說(shuō)？（以舊帶新）

教What are they doing?這一句型。

（8）出示課件：

T：Look at the men under the tree.Guess.What are they doing?

Ss：下棋。

T：Yes.They are playing chess.教men, chess和playing chess

T:(結(jié)合圖片)This is a man, and they are men.(出示幻燈片)Who can match?

出示課件：Look at these girls.How many girls?

（鞏固剛剛教的單復(fù)數(shù)。）

出示圖片：Who can match?

(questions: Look at _____girl.Look at ____girls.)

（9）T：Guess.What are they doing?

Ss：Drinking.T：They are drinking soybean milk.教drinking(TPR), soybean milk(milk在Book2 Module 4 學(xué)過(guò)，復(fù)習(xí)呈現(xiàn)，不重點(diǎn)學(xué)。)

2、課文呈現(xiàn) T：Listen to the radio and answer questions.At the first time, you just listen.At the second time, you answer questions.（1）Look at the people in the park.They are doing _________.(2)Look at the people on the lake.They’re rowing a __________.（3）Look at the man under the tree.They are __________.（4）Look at these girls.They are drinking________.Step 3: Practice(模仿性操練活動(dòng))

1、Game : Role play and lucky numbers.（讓生在玩中學(xué)習(xí)語(yǔ)言，記住語(yǔ)言）

T：I will choose some of your numbers.You will play the dialougue if you are chosen.（播放幻燈片，被抽中的學(xué)生根據(jù)幻燈片的圖與句來(lái)兩兩操練。）

Step 4: Consolidation（鞏固活動(dòng)）

Guessing Game（讓生在玩中運(yùn)用語(yǔ)言）

1、出示課件，快速?gòu)?fù)習(xí)一些有關(guān)動(dòng)作的詞

playing with a basketball, writing a letter, watching TV, taking pictures, talking to friends 等。

2、T：Let’s play a guessing game.I want four students to come here and help me.Who can?（學(xué)生上來(lái)以后）One student guess, and three students do the actions according to the PPT.The others ask “What are they doing?”這一遍是為了給學(xué)生做示范，所以在玩的過(guò)程中師會(huì)提示。

3、在這四個(gè)學(xué)生的幫助下，師做完了示范，此后開(kāi)始玩游戲。

Step 5: Extension(擴(kuò)展活動(dòng))

Look and say

T: Do you like Xi Yangyang yu Hui Tailang? Here are two pictures about it.In each pictuer, there are sheep and wolfs.Choose two of them to make a dialougue.Let me show you an example.Example:

A: Wow!Look at them.What are they doing?

B: They are doing lots of things.Xi Yangyang is saying “Hello” to Mei Yangyang.But Mei Yangyang is crying.T: Now work in pairs, then I’ll choose some of you to make dialuogues.(《喜羊羊與灰太狼》是現(xiàn)階段最受小學(xué)生歡迎的動(dòng)畫(huà)片，選其作為擴(kuò)展性操練的情景，小學(xué)生表達(dá)的欲望會(huì)非常強(qiáng)烈的。)

Step 6: Summery and homework（課堂總結(jié)和作業(yè)布置）

1、Say the chant 指導(dǎo)背誦。學(xué)生先看圖，在師的指導(dǎo)下用歌謠的形式進(jìn)行背誦。最后用幻燈片播出四幅圖，讓學(xué)生嘗試用歌謠的形式將課文背下來(lái)。（學(xué)習(xí)策略：用chant來(lái)輔助記憶，教學(xué)生可以用這樣的方法進(jìn)行背誦課文。將課文用歌謠的形式背誦，既易背，又有趣。）T：Can you say the chant according to the pictures?(指導(dǎo)背誦)

2、布置作業(yè)

Recite the dialougue.（課后作業(yè)是為了鞏固課堂上學(xué)生所學(xué)的內(nèi)容，如果課堂上學(xué)生已經(jīng)達(dá)到了學(xué)習(xí)的目標(biāo)，課后就應(yīng)該不用做作業(yè)了。但學(xué)生要運(yùn)用語(yǔ)言，就要先記住所學(xué)的內(nèi)容，為了確保這一點(diǎn)，我讓學(xué)生用歌謠背課文，既輕松，又可以記住語(yǔ)言。）

Module3 Unit2

What’s the elephant doing? 教學(xué)案例

一、教學(xué)目標(biāo)：

1、知識(shí)目標(biāo)：

識(shí)記單詞：draw, jump, sing, dance 認(rèn)讀句子： What’s the elephant doing?

2、能力目標(biāo)：

全體學(xué)生能運(yùn)用What’s the elephant doing? 詢(xún)問(wèn)不明白的情景，并進(jìn)行說(shuō)明。

3、情感目標(biāo)：

學(xué)習(xí)策略：遇到問(wèn)題主動(dòng)向老師或同學(xué)請(qǐng)教。

文化意識(shí)：通過(guò)了解英語(yǔ)詞匯中的漢語(yǔ)借詞，初步感知中外文化的異同。情感態(tài)度：樂(lè)于感知并積極嘗試使用英語(yǔ)。

二、教學(xué)重難點(diǎn)：

識(shí)記單詞：draw, jump, sing, dance 認(rèn)讀句子： What’s the elephant doing?

三、教學(xué)用具：

電子課本、點(diǎn)讀筆、課件

四、課堂教學(xué)程序： 課前預(yù)測(cè)： 1.熱身復(fù)習(xí)

出示一些人活動(dòng)的圖片，向?qū)W生提問(wèn)“What are they doing？”“What is she doing ?”請(qǐng)學(xué)生回答。老師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)：“大家的本領(lǐng)都不簡(jiǎn)單，那么大家想知道Daming 和 Amy 又去了什么地方嗎？ Let’s have a look!”

展示課本活動(dòng)一的動(dòng)畫(huà)，請(qǐng)同學(xué)們看圖。再次播放動(dòng)畫(huà)，請(qǐng)同學(xué)們完整的聽(tīng)一遍。最后播放錄音，請(qǐng)同學(xué)們看圖跟讀。2.任務(wù)呈現(xiàn)： 教師告訴學(xué)生：“為了準(zhǔn)備校園英語(yǔ)看圖說(shuō)話(huà)競(jìng)賽，我們今天要進(jìn)行畫(huà)圖說(shuō)話(huà)比賽，在此之前，我們先來(lái)學(xué)習(xí)一下動(dòng)物名稱(chēng)吧?！?3.課文教學(xué)

?

播放活動(dòng)二的動(dòng)畫(huà)，請(qǐng)同學(xué)們看圖理解語(yǔ)境。?

再次播放，讓學(xué)生完整的聽(tīng)一遍 ?

再次播放，讓學(xué)生逐圖跟讀語(yǔ)句。

?

使用單詞圖片、單詞卡片等學(xué)習(xí)新單詞。?

分小組表演課文。4.訓(xùn)練鞏固。

?

完成課本活動(dòng)3 ?

完成課本活動(dòng)4 ?

完成課本活動(dòng)5 ?

完成活動(dòng)用書(shū)的相關(guān)習(xí)題。學(xué)習(xí)歌曲

5、任務(wù)完成： 教師告訴學(xué)生：“為了進(jìn)一步選拔參加校園英語(yǔ)看圖說(shuō)話(huà)競(jìng)賽的選手，現(xiàn)在我們?cè)诎嗉?jí)范圍內(nèi)進(jìn)行畫(huà)圖說(shuō)話(huà)比賽?！?/p>

五、家庭作業(yè)： A：向家人展示自己跟讀模仿課文錄音的情況。B:向家人或同伴演唱本模塊學(xué)習(xí)的歌曲。C:完成活動(dòng)用書(shū)練習(xí)四

Module4 Unit 1Do you want some rice?教學(xué)設(shè)計(jì)

一．教學(xué)目標(biāo)

1.能聽(tīng)說(shuō)讀寫(xiě)單詞：fast food、chopsticks、difficult、want、make, 2.學(xué)生能運(yùn)用句子：Do you want some...?并能做出正確回答Yes,please.No,thank you.二、教學(xué)重 難點(diǎn)：

1.教學(xué)重點(diǎn)：掌握句型Do you want some...?Yes,please.No,thank you.并能就食物的選擇向他人提問(wèn)或回答他人。

2.教學(xué)難點(diǎn)： chopsticks、difficult的發(fā)音及新句型的運(yùn)用。

三、教具準(zhǔn)備 實(shí)物圖片、四、教學(xué)過(guò)程 一）Warming up

1、Play a game: gussing game T:Hello,boys and girls.Ss:...T:Today we will learn the new lesson Module5 Food.First, let's play a guessing game.(復(fù)習(xí)以前學(xué)過(guò)的食物的單詞)引導(dǎo)學(xué)生要用句型：Have you got _____? Yes ,I have.No, I haven’t.二）

presentation and practice

1、Do you like the food?

2、T:duplings、noodles and rice are Chinese fast food.Do you like Chinese fast food?

Ss:...（教學(xué)fast food）

T:Do you want some rice?(引出課題)用duplings、noodles 替換rice練讀句型Do you want some...?并讓學(xué)生用此句型向老師提問(wèn)。老師回答Yes,please.No,thank you.3、T:I like noodles.But I don't know making noodles.Do you know making noodles? Ss:...T:（出示圖片）Look, he's making noodles.(隨機(jī)教學(xué) making noodles)

4、T:I'm hungry.I want to eat some noodles.I need chopsticks.(拿出筷子)教讀單詞： chopsticks

difficult（個(gè)人讀-小組讀，齊讀）

5、教授句型：Do you want some...?Yes,please.No,thank you.1）板書(shū)Do you want some...? 2）引導(dǎo)學(xué)生回答Yes,please.No,thank you并板書(shū)

6、practice 老師輪流指著實(shí)物圖片提問(wèn)Do you want some...?

8、聽(tīng)課文錄音

Module4 Unit2 How much is it? 教學(xué)設(shè)計(jì)

一、教材分析

本課是第四模塊的第二課，既延續(xù)了第一課的內(nèi)容有向外發(fā)展購(gòu)物知識(shí)的內(nèi)容。以買(mǎi)賣(mài)商品為對(duì)話(huà)內(nèi)容?？紤]到本班實(shí)際情況，整節(jié)課以說(shuō)為主，為學(xué)生學(xué)以致用的語(yǔ)言活動(dòng)提供了語(yǔ)言鋪墊。購(gòu)物作為我們生活中的相關(guān)話(huà)題，有助于吸引學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)興趣，幫助學(xué)生積極開(kāi)展英語(yǔ)日常會(huì)話(huà)。

二、教學(xué)目標(biāo) 1 知識(shí)目標(biāo)：

A學(xué)生能掌握購(gòu)物時(shí)雙方能使用的基本句型：can I help you ?how much is it?”“It;s...yuan.” B使用所學(xué)知識(shí)運(yùn)用到活動(dòng)場(chǎng)景中 2 能力目標(biāo)：A通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)購(gòu)物常用句型提高學(xué)生英語(yǔ)交際口語(yǔ)能力B 通過(guò)真實(shí)情景任務(wù)提高學(xué)生綜合運(yùn)用語(yǔ)言的能力 情感目標(biāo)：引導(dǎo)學(xué)生熱愛(ài)生活，積極投入社會(huì)，享受溝通樂(lè)趣，同時(shí)有意的培養(yǎng)學(xué)生團(tuán)隊(duì)的合作意識(shí)。

三.教學(xué)重,難點(diǎn)

1.重點(diǎn):掌握有關(guān)描述食物的價(jià)格和單詞.2.難點(diǎn)：how much 的運(yùn)用

四、教學(xué)準(zhǔn)備

單詞卡 價(jià)格標(biāo)簽 多媒體課件

五、教學(xué)過(guò)程 Step1: Warming up 1.Greeting T: Good morning, boys and girls.How are you today? Ss: Fine, thank you.And you T: I’m very well, thank you.2 sing a song “What do you want? juice or ice? What do you want? potato or tomato?”

(設(shè)計(jì)意圖:唱歌謠及歌曲熱身,激發(fā)學(xué)生興趣.用實(shí)物展示,創(chuàng)設(shè)真實(shí)的情景,為學(xué)生提供一個(gè)極佳的語(yǔ)言實(shí)踐機(jī)會(huì),并能從舊知識(shí)自然過(guò)渡到新內(nèi)容上來(lái)).3.Guessing game ???

Step2: Leading in(1)出示食物圖片rice milk meat dumping....教授dumping及flower新單詞。在圖片的后面標(biāo)出價(jià)格(引入課文重點(diǎn)句子)T:Guess, how much is it? one yuan or five yuan and ten yuan?(2)教授句子How much is it? T: Do you want some dumpling? Ss: Yes,please.T: OK，let me see how much is it? Ss: It is ten yuan.(3)操練句子How much is it?(4)同桌之間互相問(wèn)圖片物品價(jià)格 S1：How much is it? S2:It’s...yuan

(6)教授句子“can I help you?”師出示句子Can I help you?并帶讀，適當(dāng)?shù)亟忉屢幌滤囊馑?。然后再?qǐng)一生上來(lái)扮演顧客，把剛才的劇 情表演一遍：A：Can I help you? B：Yes, How much is it? A：It’s...yuan.(設(shè)計(jì)意圖:運(yùn)用實(shí)物,圖片介紹新語(yǔ)言項(xiàng)目,為學(xué)生創(chuàng)設(shè)了真實(shí)的有意義的情景,讓學(xué)生得到直觀的感性認(rèn)識(shí),加大了課程容量,接生了時(shí)間,同時(shí)也教給學(xué)生用不同的物體作替換練習(xí)方法).Step 3:Presentation 多媒體課件板書(shū)

(1)視聽(tīng)，講解課文。

(2)教師教讀，師生對(duì)讀，分角色朗讀，(3)學(xué)生齊讀請(qǐng)兩位學(xué)生進(jìn)行表演,一人扮售貨員,一人扮顧客.（在讀書(shū)時(shí)激發(fā)學(xué)生能量，通常采取男女生比賽或小組比賽的讀書(shū)效果很好）

Ste4:Play a game 1.在教室前門(mén)和講臺(tái)處,布置成商店,將標(biāo)有價(jià)格的實(shí)物掛在墻上和白在講臺(tái)上,學(xué)生可以在商店中來(lái)回走動(dòng),與同伴一起練習(xí)用英文購(gòu)物.請(qǐng)二學(xué)生扮演售貨員.(師及時(shí)對(duì)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)進(jìn)行鼓勵(lì)性評(píng)價(jià).)Assistant: Can I help you? S: Yes,How much is it？

Assistant: It’s five yuan.Do you want it? S: Yes, please.Assistant: Here you are.(取下來(lái),交給”顧客”)S:Thank you

采購(gòu)單

Thing(物品)Price(價(jià)格)milk ￥2 fish ￥5 rice ￥1 meat ￥6 noodles ￥3 cake ￥4

Step 5: Practice and consolidation(1)Have a rest Make a cake make a cake put in the pan Make a cake make me cake as fast as you can(2)小講how much與how many(設(shè)計(jì)意圖:1.鞏固本課所學(xué)的重點(diǎn)內(nèi)容,同時(shí)訓(xùn)練發(fā)揮發(fā)散思維,培養(yǎng)探究新知識(shí)的意識(shí);2.培養(yǎng)學(xué)生在真實(shí)情景下進(jìn)行焦急能力,培養(yǎng)口語(yǔ)表達(dá)能力.)

Step 5: Summery Lead Ss to sum up

Step 6: Homework.Listen to the tape and read the dialogue.Write the words.Module5 Unit 1Can you run fast?教學(xué)案例

教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 認(rèn)知目標(biāo)

1、識(shí)記can、run fast、jump high、jump far and ride fast等詞匯。

2、掌握句型Can you?？及回答Yes, I can./No, I can’t.并 能運(yùn)用。能力目標(biāo)

1、能運(yùn)用Can you??的句型詢(xún)問(wèn)他人在某一方面的能力。

2、能運(yùn)用 You can?/You can’t?的句型客觀的評(píng)價(jià)他人在某一方面的能力

3、能運(yùn)用所學(xué)的語(yǔ)言知識(shí)來(lái)談?wù)劇拔視?huì)做的運(yùn)動(dòng)”。情感目標(biāo)

1、懂得客觀的評(píng)價(jià)自己和別人。

2、通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)，學(xué)生能夠熱愛(ài)運(yùn)動(dòng)、積極參加各種運(yùn)動(dòng)。教學(xué)重點(diǎn)

詞匯run fast、jump high、jump far、ride fast和句型Can you?？Yes, I can./ No, I can’t.等知識(shí)的掌握和運(yùn)用。教學(xué)難點(diǎn)

能運(yùn)用所學(xué)的語(yǔ)言知識(shí)來(lái)談?wù)劇拔視?huì)做的運(yùn)動(dòng)”。課前準(zhǔn)備 1．教具準(zhǔn)備

（１）實(shí)物：籃球、足球、乒乓球。（２）點(diǎn)讀筆。2．課件準(zhǔn)備

本課內(nèi)容圖片及相關(guān)的動(dòng)畫(huà)。.教學(xué)過(guò)程

●Step 1 Greeting Good morning，boys and girls.How are you? ●Step 2: Warming-up 1．學(xué)生邊做動(dòng)作邊唱歌曲 《I’m listening to music 》 設(shè)計(jì)理念：

新《標(biāo)準(zhǔn)》注重學(xué)生的情感因素，著力培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的學(xué)習(xí)興趣，激發(fā)他們的學(xué)習(xí)動(dòng)機(jī)。小學(xué)生都喜歡唱歌、能給活潑可愛(ài)的小學(xué)生們營(yíng)造歡樂(lè)的學(xué)習(xí)氣氛，使學(xué)生的情緒高漲，提高學(xué)生的學(xué)習(xí)積極性，同時(shí)為學(xué)習(xí)起到復(fù)習(xí)和過(guò)渡的作用。2.復(fù)習(xí)學(xué)過(guò)的體育運(yùn)動(dòng)

What are they doing ?（出示圖片）引導(dǎo)學(xué)生回答： playing football，playing basketball playing table tennis swimming jumping running 3..動(dòng)詞變變變

（老師通過(guò)課件顯示變回原形的動(dòng)詞）讓學(xué)生說(shuō)說(shuō)它們的變化。play football，play basketball play table tennis swim jump run 設(shè)計(jì)理念：

由于一段時(shí)間內(nèi)，學(xué)生接觸的是動(dòng)詞的現(xiàn)在分詞形式，為了讓學(xué)生給動(dòng)詞還原，先讓學(xué)生說(shuō)出動(dòng)詞的現(xiàn)在分詞形式，在說(shuō)出動(dòng)詞的原形，讓學(xué)生感受其變化過(guò)程。●Step 3: Presentation of the text 1.課件出示畫(huà)面和課文錄音，學(xué)生聽(tīng)后判斷。（1）Sam can run fast.()（2）Daming can jump high.()（3）Lingling can jump far.()（4）Amy can ride fast.()2．listen and repeat.設(shè)計(jì)理念：

呈現(xiàn)整篇課文內(nèi)容，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的英語(yǔ)語(yǔ)感，理解課文的大概內(nèi)容?！馭tep 4: Presentation 1.教學(xué)新單詞

(1)教授新單詞can can’t（解釋 can’t = can not）（課件出示）再引導(dǎo)學(xué)生用I can?/I can`t?說(shuō)句子(2)教學(xué)run fast ①(出示運(yùn)動(dòng)員跑步圖片)Look at this.What sport is this ? Yes ,it is run(師做跑步動(dòng)作).出示單詞（run, run fast）Run, run, run fast(師加快跑步動(dòng)作)Can you run fast ? ②Now, stand up, please!Say and do after me.③個(gè)人、小組、集體等讀.2．教學(xué)句型Can you run fast ?以及回答Yes, I can./ No, I can’t.（1）觀看課文動(dòng)畫(huà)，找出can 和can’t.。（課件播放）

（2）教師分別出示一個(gè)籃球、足球、乒乓球。Look, What is this? 引導(dǎo)學(xué)生回答it’s a basketball.it’s a football.it’s a table tennis T:I can play basketball.I can play table tennis.But I can’t play football.can you play basketball? 引導(dǎo)學(xué)生回答：Yes, I can./ No, I can’t.T: can you play football? 學(xué)生回答：yes, I can./ No, I can’t.設(shè)計(jì)理念：

由學(xué)生身邊的日?；顒?dòng)為話(huà)題引入新知學(xué)習(xí)，從學(xué)生的生活經(jīng)驗(yàn)出發(fā)激發(fā)興趣，導(dǎo)入過(guò)渡自然，簡(jiǎn)潔明快，為整個(gè)教學(xué)環(huán)節(jié)的展開(kāi)作了良好的鋪墊。

（3）教學(xué)新單詞jump high、jump far、ride fast.（課件分別出示）把新單詞放進(jìn)Can you ? ?的句型操練?！馭tep 5: Practice 1.小組比賽 兩人小組分別進(jìn)行jump high /jump far比賽，如其他人說(shuō)jump、jump、jump high，結(jié)束后教師評(píng)價(jià)Who’s the winner? XX is the winner.XX說(shuō) I’m the winner.2．談?wù)劇拔視?huì)做的運(yùn)動(dòng)”。（1）（課件出示）Can you..? Yes, I can./ No, I can’t.（2）兩人小組自由談?wù)摗拔視?huì)做的運(yùn)動(dòng)”（3）抽取兩個(gè)小組上臺(tái)表演。

3.練習(xí): Fill in the blanks with “can” or “can’t”.(課件出示)

1)The dog _______ fly.2)I _______ eat a plane.3)The fish _______ swim.4)Sam _______ run fast.●Step6: Homework 回家后用Can you?？的句型來(lái)詢(xún)問(wèn)家人和朋友。

Module5 Unit2 Can Sam play football?

Teaching aims : 1.Knowledge aim:復(fù)習(xí)短語(yǔ)run fast/ jump high / jump far / ride fast及句型Can you ?？Yes, I can.、No ,I can`t.2.Ability aim:能運(yùn)用Can Sam play football??詢(xún)問(wèn)他人的能力并進(jìn)行回答：Yes,he can./No,he can’t.3.Emotion aim:通過(guò)看聽(tīng)說(shuō)演唱等活動(dòng),使學(xué)生產(chǎn)生學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的興趣,樹(shù)立學(xué)好英語(yǔ)的信心。Importance points：能運(yùn)用Can Sam play football??詢(xún)問(wèn)他人的能力并進(jìn)行回答：Yes,he can./No,he can’t.Difficult points：能運(yùn)用Can Sam play football??詢(xún)問(wèn)他人的能力并進(jìn)行回答：Yes,he can./No,he can’t.Teaching method：任務(wù)教學(xué)法、情境教學(xué)法、交際法、聽(tīng)說(shuō)演唱法、愉快教學(xué)法 Teaching tools： a football/ a basketball/ tape/ word cards Teaching procedures 教學(xué)過(guò)程： Step 1 Warmer 1.Greeting 2.Let’s sing a song:I’m listening to music Step 2 Presentation of new sentences 1.Play the tape:Listen and learn the chant.2.Ask and answer:Can you…..?Yes,I can./NO,I can’t.3.T:上節(jié)課我們調(diào)查了全班同學(xué)的才能。學(xué)習(xí)了今天的課文后，我們就能根據(jù)大家的才能組建興趣小組了。

Step3 New teaching 1.Play the tape:Please listen to the tape and count:How many “can”?(Four can)2.Play the tape again:Listen and point,then repeat.3.Show cards:teach words”strong,star”(star:星星、明星、評(píng)價(jià)里面的小星星)4.Act the dialogue with the partner,then show.(分組、男女生分角色讀)Step4 Practice 1.Act3:觀察圖中人物的表情和動(dòng)作，請(qǐng)生嘗試說(shuō)出圖中的動(dòng)物名稱(chēng)

（兩人一組，一人指，一人仿照例子描述圖片。一輪后互換角色）2.Act4:Learn the chant.1).觀察插圖并嘗試描述其內(nèi)容。

2).Play the tape:Listen and repeat.引導(dǎo)生理解歌詞描述的情境：A不會(huì)做某事，B向A提供幫助，然后兩人一起完成任務(wù)。并鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生向歌曲中的人物學(xué)習(xí)，培養(yǎng)互相幫助的良好品質(zhì)。

3).Play the tape:逐句停頓，生跟唱，再小組內(nèi)演唱、做動(dòng)作。3.Act5:Play the game with your partner.4.Exercise book:Finish the exercises.Step5 Summary 1.我們已經(jīng)學(xué)習(xí)了如何使用“can”詢(xún)問(wèn)他人的能力并描述自己的能力，現(xiàn)在組建班內(nèi)興趣小組。Names Play football Run fast Sing songs Jump far Ride bikes Jump high 2.舉辦班級(jí)才能展示大會(huì)。Step6 Homeworks 1.Act the dialogue for your family.2.Sing the new song for your family.

第二篇：新外研版四年級(jí)英語(yǔ)下冊(cè)教案全冊(cè)

四年級(jí)英語(yǔ)下冊(cè)教案

一、指導(dǎo)思想

激發(fā)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的興趣，培養(yǎng)他們學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的積極態(tài)度，使他們建立初步的學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的自信心；培養(yǎng)學(xué)生一定的語(yǔ)感和良好的語(yǔ)音、語(yǔ)調(diào)基礎(chǔ)，使他們形成初步運(yùn)用英語(yǔ)進(jìn)行簡(jiǎn)單日常交流和書(shū)寫(xiě)，為進(jìn)一步學(xué)習(xí)打下基礎(chǔ)。

二、學(xué)情分析

我所教的四年級(jí)二班的學(xué)生共14人，通過(guò)一年的學(xué)習(xí)，大部分學(xué)生已經(jīng)入門(mén)，開(kāi)始進(jìn)入狀態(tài)，對(duì)英語(yǔ)的學(xué)習(xí)產(chǎn)生了濃厚的興趣。但也有個(gè)別學(xué)生由于平時(shí)沒(méi)有養(yǎng)成良好的學(xué)習(xí)習(xí)慣，課堂學(xué)習(xí)效果較差，對(duì)于他們要因材施教，注重差異，找出優(yōu)缺點(diǎn)，本學(xué)期及時(shí)改進(jìn)，共同進(jìn)步。

三、教學(xué)目的、任務(wù)

1、提升學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的興趣，養(yǎng)成良好的朗讀書(shū)寫(xiě)的習(xí)慣；

2、發(fā)音準(zhǔn)確、朗讀流利，準(zhǔn)確掌握書(shū)中的重點(diǎn)內(nèi)容；

3、能夠進(jìn)行簡(jiǎn)單的日常用語(yǔ)的交流；

4、能夠用簡(jiǎn)單的句子進(jìn)行寫(xiě)作；

5、熟練掌握所學(xué)歌曲、chant等

6、了解西方文化，初步知道課文的文化背景。

四、教學(xué)重點(diǎn)難點(diǎn) 1．重點(diǎn)：

（1）提高課堂效率。

（2）養(yǎng)成良好的聽(tīng)英語(yǔ)、讀英語(yǔ)、說(shuō)英語(yǔ)的習(xí)慣。（3）發(fā)音清楚，語(yǔ)調(diào)正確，書(shū)寫(xiě)工整。

2．難點(diǎn)：使英語(yǔ)基礎(chǔ)差的學(xué)生提高聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、讀、寫(xiě)的能力，全面提高英語(yǔ)成績(jī)。

五、方法措施

1、認(rèn)真?zhèn)湔n，鉆研《新標(biāo)準(zhǔn)英語(yǔ)》教材，進(jìn)行課堂的有效教學(xué)，提高課堂效率，做到當(dāng)堂內(nèi)容當(dāng)堂掌握。

2、創(chuàng)新運(yùn)用各種不同英語(yǔ)教學(xué)法來(lái)輔助教學(xué)，如：情景教學(xué)法、直接教學(xué)法和TPR全身反應(yīng)法，并開(kāi)展一些有趣的活動(dòng)、游戲讓學(xué)生在輕松的氛圍中學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)。

3、創(chuàng)設(shè)英語(yǔ)情景和環(huán)境，使學(xué)生們?cè)谝欢ǖ挠⒄Z(yǔ)語(yǔ)言環(huán)境里習(xí)得“第二語(yǔ)言”。做到“生活中有英語(yǔ)，英語(yǔ)中有生活”。

4、鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生大膽說(shuō)英語(yǔ)，肯定他們的進(jìn)步（尤其是英語(yǔ)基礎(chǔ)不好的學(xué)生），樹(shù)立學(xué)生的信心，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生朗讀和書(shū)寫(xiě)的習(xí)慣。

5、注重教材的靈活性和可操作性，以滿(mǎn)足不同層次的學(xué)生的需求。幫助英語(yǔ)基礎(chǔ)不好的學(xué)生，提升英語(yǔ)基礎(chǔ)好的學(xué)生。

6、多教授chant和歌謠或小故事等促進(jìn)學(xué)生多單詞和句型的記憶。充分利用教科書(shū)中的課文創(chuàng)設(shè)栩栩如生的情景，為學(xué)生提供使用英語(yǔ)進(jìn)行交流的機(jī)會(huì)。

7、課堂盡量英語(yǔ)化，打好每名同學(xué)的英語(yǔ)基礎(chǔ)，重點(diǎn)提高差生的英語(yǔ)功底，同時(shí)適當(dāng)?shù)匮a(bǔ)充些課外內(nèi)容，強(qiáng)化口語(yǔ)和應(yīng)試能力，對(duì)每一單元的內(nèi)容力爭(zhēng)人人過(guò)關(guān)。

8、練習(xí)形式多種多樣，手、腦、眼、肢體并用，靜態(tài)、動(dòng)態(tài)結(jié)合，基本功操練與自由練習(xí)結(jié)合，單項(xiàng)和綜合練習(xí)結(jié)合。通過(guò)大量地實(shí)踐，使學(xué)生具有良好地語(yǔ)音、語(yǔ)調(diào)、書(shū)寫(xiě)和拼讀地基礎(chǔ)，并能用英語(yǔ)表情達(dá)意，開(kāi)展簡(jiǎn)單的交流活動(dòng)。

六、教學(xué)進(jìn)度：

教學(xué)內(nèi)容

課時(shí)

Module 1

Module 2

Module 3

Module 4

Module 5

Module 6

Review Module1-3

Review Module4-5

Mid-term Examination

Module 7

Module 8

Module 9

Module 10

Review Module 6-8

Review Module 9-10

Final-term Review

2Final-term Review

Final examination

Module 1

Unit 1

she’s a nice teacher.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

1.Words and phrases: nice a bit shy clever naughty

2.Sentences: This is Ms Smart.She is a nice teacher.3.Grammar: Using adjectives to describe person.過(guò)程與方法：?jiǎn)卧~、課文

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：描述一個(gè)人或物的特征 德育目標(biāo)：用適當(dāng)形容詞描述人和物 教學(xué)重難點(diǎn)：

重點(diǎn)：1.Words and phrases: nice a bit shy clever naughty

2.Sentences: This is Ms Smart.She is a nice teacher.難點(diǎn)：Grammar: Using adjectives to describe person.教學(xué)方法：講授、形容詞的學(xué)習(xí)

教具準(zhǔn)備：點(diǎn)讀筆、圖片、教學(xué)掛圖、單詞卡 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Song: There are twelve months in the year.B: Free talk: Talk about your holiday.（二）探究新知Step one:

1、:利用CAI課件, 出示本單元主人公的頭像，介紹主人公，以此引出本單元新單詞：nice a bit shy clever naughty 出示卡片，學(xué)習(xí)新單詞。

2、Learn the new lesson.Step one: Listen to the tape.Try to read the text.Translate the sentences.Listen to the tape again, read follow the tape.Read the text, boys and girls.Step Two: Talk about the pictures.Close your books, show the pictures(parrot，Xiaoyong，Maomao，Ms Smart)Example :(1)This is Parrot.Parrot is a very naughty bird.(2)This is Xiaoyong.He’s a clever pupil.Step Three: Using adjectives to describe person.利用實(shí)物投影展示學(xué)生帶來(lái)的照片。(Describe the person using the adjectives

（三）鞏固新知Game: 接龍游戲 Example: A: I’m XiaoLan.I’m a bit shy.B: XiaoLan is a bit shy.I’m ZhangYong.I’m very nayghty.C: ZhangYong is very naughty.I’m Jim, I’m a nice boy.（四）小結(jié)：用簡(jiǎn)單方法介紹人和他的特征。

（五）Homework:抄寫(xiě)新單詞，每個(gè)單詞抄寫(xiě)4遍。板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)

Module 1

Unit 1 she’s a nice teacher.nice a bit shy clever naughty

This is Ms Smart.She is a nice teacher.Unit 2 He’s cool.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

1.Words and phrases: cool little cute.2.Sentences: This is this is my big brother, He’s cool.過(guò)程與方法：對(duì)比、家庭成員的特征

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：根據(jù)每個(gè)人的特征并用適當(dāng)?shù)脑~來(lái)修飾。德育目標(biāo)：培養(yǎng)對(duì)家人的關(guān)心和愛(ài)護(hù)。重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: cool little cute.難點(diǎn)：Sentences: This is this is my big brother, He’s cool.教學(xué)方法：講授、對(duì)比

教具準(zhǔn)備：點(diǎn)讀筆、圖片、教學(xué)掛圖、單詞卡 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Song: Row Row Row your boat.B: Free talk: Using adjectives to describe the poem.（二）探究新知Step one: Warmer: Using the adjectives to describe your classmates.Example: ① This is Xiaoyong.He is a clever pupil.② This is Yuanjiaqi.She’s very clever, but she’s a bit shy.Step Two: Listen and point.(1)Point out the different meanings of the word ―cool‖.In this unit, ―cool‖ means fashionable, and it is most commonly used to mean ―quite cold‖.The word ―cool‖ has other meanings as well, but they are ones that the students are unlikely to come across in the future.(2)Listen to the tape and underline the new words.Write down these adjectives on the board, and then learn these new words.Listen to the tape again.Read the text.Close your book.Use CAI shows the pictures of text.Choose some students to describe the pictures.Step Three: Listen and say, then say the poem and do the actions.Play the spoken version of the poem.And have the students.Repeat each line.Play the tape and have the students.（三）鞏固新知Tell the students that they are going to work in groups of three or four.Do the AB unit 2.Game: Explain that they are going to play a game where they

have to whisper some information to their classmate.That classmate has to whisper the information to the next person.The last person.That person has to say that he she heard.Then, the other students listen carefully to find out if the message has changed at all.（四）作業(yè)布置Homework:抄寫(xiě)課文P5的句子

（五）小結(jié)：能用英語(yǔ)表述一個(gè)人的性格

板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Unit 2 He’s cool.mother---nice big brother---cool little sister---cute father---clever friend---naughty 教學(xué)反思：

Module 2

Unit 1 London is a big city.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

Words and phrases: capital, about, beautiful, be from Sentences: I’m from London.London is the capital of England.It’s very big and very beautiful.Grammar: the present tense 過(guò)程與方法：?jiǎn)卧~、課文和對(duì)話(huà)

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：了解國(guó)外著名的旅游景點(diǎn) 德育目標(biāo)：學(xué)語(yǔ)言就學(xué)她的語(yǔ)言文化背景

重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: capital, about, beautiful, be from Sentences: I’m from London.London is the capital of England.It’s very big and very beautiful.難點(diǎn)：Grammar: the present tense 教學(xué)方法：講授、對(duì)話(huà)

教具準(zhǔn)備：點(diǎn)讀筆、圖片、教學(xué)掛圖、單詞卡 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：A: Chant: This is a little girl, and she has a little curl.And when she is good, she is very, very good.And when she is bad, she is very, very bad!B: Talk Free: T: Hello!Boys and girls.I’m a teacher.Are you a teacher? S1: No, I’m not.S2: No, I’m a pupil.T: Are you naughty? S3: No, I’m not.T: Are you clever? S4: Yes, I am.……

（反復(fù)操練，以此復(fù)習(xí)上節(jié)所學(xué)到的描述人物性格的單詞：naughty, shy, clever, nice, cool.）

（二）探究新知 Step

一、導(dǎo)入

利用卡片教授“capital”，反復(fù)領(lǐng)讀，讀熟之后帶入句子“London is the capital of England.”中。Then translate it into Chinese.找生用英語(yǔ)說(shuō)出“北京是中國(guó)的首都。”鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生踴躍參加搶答賽“說(shuō)首都”，學(xué)生可以用中文說(shuō)。

Step

二、新授

在愉快的氛圍中，師告訴學(xué)生：“Amy 和Lingling 是同班同學(xué)。一天，Amy 帶來(lái)了一本關(guān)于自己家鄉(xiāng)—倫敦的書(shū)。Lingling 看見(jiàn)這本書(shū)后非常好奇，于是就請(qǐng)Amy 向她介紹倫敦的情況?，F(xiàn)在我們就來(lái)跟 Amy 學(xué)一學(xué)怎樣描述城市和景物。今天學(xué)習(xí)過(guò)后，請(qǐng)大家也來(lái)介紹一下自己熟悉的城市、地區(qū)或景物。

請(qǐng)學(xué)生聽(tīng)錄音，聽(tīng)一聽(tīng)Amy 和 Lingling 之間的對(duì)話(huà)。師：“Where is London?” 生在地圖上指出倫敦的位置。

再放一遍錄音，讓學(xué)生在自己的書(shū)上勾出描述城市的形容詞（nice, big, beautiful, small）。

請(qǐng)學(xué)生根據(jù)插圖和上下文猜一猜每個(gè)生詞的意思?！癰eautiful”一詞教師要反復(fù)示范，借助肢體語(yǔ)言幫助學(xué)生讀清并理解這一單詞。個(gè)別單詞處理完之后，教師領(lǐng)讀課文幾遍。然后鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生分角色大膽試讀，教師及時(shí)給予表?yè)P(yáng)。新|課

| 標(biāo)|第|一| 網(wǎng)

（三）鞏固新知練習(xí)

完成SB 第一單元活動(dòng)3。把全班分成兩人一組，分別扮演 Amy 和 Lingling，進(jìn)行問(wèn)答練習(xí)。

例如：

1、A: What’s this?

B: It’s a book about London.It’s very nice.2、A: What’s the capital of England?

B: It’s London.（四）作業(yè)布置：抄寫(xiě)單詞

（五）小結(jié)：去描述一個(gè)名勝古跡的特征 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì):

Module 2

Unit 1 London is a big city.It’s a book about London.London is the capital of England.Unit 2 It’s very old.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

Words and phrases: long, wide, many, river, old, famous Sentences: This is the River Thames.It’s long and wide.Grammar: Using adjectives to describe cities and buildings.過(guò)程與方法：描述、對(duì)話(huà)

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：圖覽泰晤士河、大本鐘、海德公園和倫敦塔橋 德育目標(biāo)：通過(guò)圖覽這四個(gè)名勝古跡了解更多的地理知識(shí) 重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: long, wide, many, river, old, famous Sentences: This is the River Thames.It’s long and wide.難點(diǎn)：Grammar: Using adjectives to describe cities and buildings.教學(xué)方法：描述、學(xué)歌

教具準(zhǔn)備：點(diǎn)讀筆、圖片、教學(xué)掛圖、單詞卡 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：A: Song: Chant: This is a little girl.B: Talk about: Using adjectives to describe a person’s personality and London.（二）探究新知Step one、Warmer: Revise adjectives.Tell the students that I am going to say an adjective.They have to find something in their books that the adjective describes.Ask two or three students to say which object the chose.Example：T: It’s big.S1:(points to London)London.S2:(points to elephant)Elephant.S3:(points to Beijing)Beijing.Do more examples with the class.Step two、Listen, point and say:

1、Listen, point and find out the new words and underlime them.Then revise them using cards or pictures.(Write down these words on the board.)

2、After doing this, tell the students to close their books.I am going to say the first word of a two-word place name.These places are all in London.The students have to say the second word of the two-word name.Example: T: Buckingham…

Ss: …Palace.T: Hyde…

Ss:…Park.3、Have the students continue the activity in pairs.They should take turn to say the first word.4、Showing four pictures on the screen about “the River Thames”, “Big Ben”, “Hyde Park”, and “Tower Bridge”.(Write down these words.)The same time, I am going to read the text for the students.Have them remember the sentences.The second times, ask some students to introduce the pictures.5、Games: Guessing game.6、Do AB Unit 2 exercise 1.Quiz: Listen and say the answers.7、Showing AB Unit2 exercise 2 on the screen.Do this exercise together.（三）鞏固新知Step three Practice

1、Do SB Unit2 activity 4.Listen and point.First, have students say something about these pictures.Then listen and guess which one is right.2、Do AB Unit2 exercise 4.Write about your school building.Step four、Learn to sing

1、Have the students look at the picture and describe it(children playing a game).2、Tell the students that this song, 'London Bridge is falling down' is a traditional English song.Explain that London Bridge is a very famous bridge in London.3、Play the spoken version of the song and have the students repeat each line.Play the tape and have the students sing the song.4、Explain the actions and have the class sing the song again.Choose some students to come to the front and play it.Let's see “Who is the winner?”

Have the students sing and do the actions after class.Games:

1、Guessing game

Tell the students that I am going to say adjectives and they have to think of some places in China that these adjectives describe.Example

T: Old.S1: Great Wall.S2: Palace Museum.（四）Homework：抄寫(xiě)課文第11頁(yè)的句子，每句抄寫(xiě)2次。

（五）小結(jié)：了解英國(guó)的四大名勝古跡

板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Designs:

Unit 2 It’s very old.The River Thames

——

long and wide Big Ben

——

old and tall Hyde Park

——

beautiful Tower Bridge

——

famous and beautiful 課后反思：

Module 3 Unit 1 Robots will do everything.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

1.Sentences: One day, robots will do everything.2.Words and phrases: robot

everything one day

housework

that

3.Using will to describe things in the future

過(guò)程與方法：Describing things in the future and talking about abilities 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：對(duì)機(jī)器人將來(lái)能力的期待 德育目標(biāo)：要養(yǎng)成好習(xí)慣、自己的作業(yè)自己完成 重點(diǎn)：1.Sentences: One day, robots will do everything.2.Words and phrases: robot

everything

one day

housework

learn

our that 難點(diǎn)：Using will to describe things in the future 教學(xué)方法：講授、對(duì)話(huà)

教具準(zhǔn)備：點(diǎn)讀筆、圖片、教學(xué)掛圖、單詞卡 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

learn

our

（一）導(dǎo)入：(1)Warming up:---Greeting.Listen and act : e.g.wash clothes

watch TV

run

walk

play the flute

play football

jump

do homework

make a cake

row a boat play table tennis

(運(yùn)用肢體語(yǔ)言來(lái)復(fù)習(xí)動(dòng)詞及動(dòng)詞詞組，為本課will 的學(xué)習(xí)做好鋪墊)

（二）探究新知(2)Presentation: Show a robot to the class and say “Today we’re going to talk about the robots.”

Describing the robots, it can sing.It can dance.One day, robots will do everything.(運(yùn)用圖片展示robot的含義)Ask to the students

“What else will the robots do?”

Show the CAI to students.(讓學(xué)生看課件了解機(jī)器人能做什么不能做什么)

Now show the text to the students.Look at the book and ask.What can Daming’s robot do? Will robots do the housework?

Will robots help children learn?...Write the answers on the board: It can walk.Then drill this sentence and then change the word ―walk‖.Talk about the sentences:

They will do the housework.They will help children learn.Write the sentence on the board One day, robots will do everything.(用磁卡帶替換動(dòng)詞及動(dòng)詞詞組，讓學(xué)生運(yùn)用所學(xué)。同時(shí)理解one day的含義)Continue the words learning: housework help children learn… In groups, talk about the robots then report.（三）鞏固新知(3)Practice: Do exercises in AB.In pairs act the text.Draw a robot and say what the robot can do.In pairs or in groups then report.Production: Look at Exercise 3 in the book and talk about what the robots will do in the future.Game: Guess what their robots will do.Then act.（讓學(xué)生先畫(huà)出自己的機(jī)器人，并展示給其他學(xué)生看，讓其他學(xué)生猜一猜。運(yùn)用任務(wù)并檢查。）

（四）作業(yè)布置Homework: 抄寫(xiě)單詞

（五）小結(jié)：動(dòng)詞一般將來(lái)時(shí)態(tài)也可以表示對(duì)未來(lái)的期待和預(yù)想 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Design:

Module 3

Unit 1 Robots will do everything.It can walk.One day, robots will do everything.Unit 2 On Monday I’ll go swimming.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

1.Words and phrases: homework, help, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday 2.Sentences: On Monday I’ll go swimming.Will you play football on Monday? Yes, I will.../No, I won’t.過(guò)程與方法：課文、歌曲、游戲

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：一般將來(lái)時(shí)可以表示今后打算 德育目標(biāo)：用將來(lái)時(shí)說(shuō)出自己一周的打算

重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: homework, help, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday 難點(diǎn)： Sentences: On Monday I’ll go swimming.Will you play football on Monday? Yes, I will.../No, I won’t.教學(xué)方法：講授和游戲

教具準(zhǔn)備：點(diǎn)讀筆、圖片、教學(xué)掛圖、單詞卡 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Warming up

Write the numbers1-7on the board.Write the words Monday to Sunday under the numbers.Have them predict the meaning of the words, Monday, Tuesday and so on.Point to the words and say them.Have the students repeat them.Now tell the students that you are going to say a day and they have to use an ordinal number and say which day is it.（二）探究新知Now point ,ask and answer Have the students suggest activities that they do and write a list on the board.e.g.play football, ride a bike, go swimming, read a book, watch TV, go to the cinema, go to school, walk in the park, play with a friend, do homework.Then draw the following calendar on the board: Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Sunday Friday Saturday Have the students copy the calendar in their exercise book.They should write activities on the calendar.Then have the students work in pairs and tell one another what they will do on the seven day of the week.e.g.S1: On Monday I will watch TV.S2: I will do my homework on Monday.（三）鞏固新知Listen and say ,then sing and clap Before singing the song Have the students look the picture and say what type of song this is.Have the children say the names of any clapping songs or games they know.Then act.While singing the song Play the tape and let the student listen to the melody.Then play the spoken version of the song and have the students repeat the line.Divide the students into seven groups.Asking each group a day of the week respectively.Have the students in each group write their day on a piece of paper.Explin that they must hold up their day of the week as they sing that word in the song, now have the class sing the song.（四）作業(yè)布置Homework：

（五）小結(jié)：一般將來(lái)時(shí)可以表示今后打算、還有will=’ll 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Design

Unit2 On Monday I’ll go swimming

homework

家庭作業(yè)

help

幫助

Monday

星期一

Tuesday

星期二

Wednesday

星期三

Thursday

星期四

Friday

星期五

Saturday

星期六

Sunday

星期日

Module 4 Unit 1 Will you take your kite？

教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能： words and phrase：picnic take great ball why

beacause so 2 Sentence： We’re going to have a picinic

Will you take your kite？

Yes，I will./No, I won’t.3 Grammar: Talk about plan 過(guò)程與方法： 單詞、課文和句型

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：正因?yàn)槭谴禾臁⒁灰安托问阶鰷?zhǔn)備

德育目標(biāo)：春季是戶(hù)外運(yùn)動(dòng)的好時(shí)機(jī)、勞逸結(jié)合、多到戶(hù)外去運(yùn)動(dòng)。重點(diǎn)： words and phrase：picnic

take

great ball

why

beacause so Sentence： We’re going to have a picinic

Will you take your kite？ Yes，I will./No, I won’t.難點(diǎn)： Grammar: Talk about plan 教學(xué)方法：講授、對(duì)話(huà) 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：A: Songs: London Bridge Following Down B: Free talk: Our school

（二）探究新知New concepts: Step1: Warmer: Teacher show some pictures about the ―Hyde Park

River Thames‖ S1: This is Big Ben.It’s very old and very beautiful.S1: This is Hyde Park.It’s very beautiful.S3:...Step2: Listen and point.T: It’s a ball.(Show the ball)I’m going to play ball.Will you play with me? S2: Yes, I will.T: I’m going to go to Hainain.Will you take a ball?(同時(shí)板書(shū))S2：No，I won't.Step3: Teacher shows the cards about the new words.Students follow the teacher.The students read one by one.I play the tape and the students follow the recorder.S1: Will you go to Huanren tomorrow? S2: Yes, I will.S3: Tomorrow we’re going to have a Music lesson.S4: No, I won’t.Will和going to 的用法評(píng)出最好的一組。

（三）鞏固新知Game：A： Two students play a game ．They choose one food or one object and do the action.S1: Will you take some noodles? S2: No, I won’t.S1: Will you take a cake? S2: Yes, I will.B: Four students look some pictures and tale about.A: We’re going to go to Hainan tomorrow.I will take my coat and my hat.Will you take your swimsuit?（用CAI）

B: No, I won’t.I’ll take my coat, too.Will you take your gloves? C: YES, I Will… D: 評(píng)出最佳一組給sticker

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié):通過(guò)簡(jiǎn)短的幽默對(duì)話(huà)初步接觸動(dòng)詞的一般將來(lái)時(shí) 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Design:

Unit 1 Will you take your kite? take

We are going to have a picnic.picnic

Will you take your kite? great

Yes, I will./ No, I won’t.ball why because so

Unit 2

Will it be hot in Haikou? 教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

1.Words: weather

hot

cold

sunny

snow

rain

windy 2.Sentences: Will it be hot in Haikou?

Yes, it will./ No，it won't.3.Using ―will‖ to describe weather in the future.過(guò)程與方法：Describing weather in the future and talking about weather.情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：用英語(yǔ)進(jìn)行對(duì)天氣的預(yù)想 德育目標(biāo)：養(yǎng)成學(xué)生有規(guī)律的生活習(xí)慣

重點(diǎn)：1.Words: weather

hot

cold

sunny

snow

rain

windy 2.Sentences: Will it be windy in Beijing? Yes, it will./ No，it won't.難點(diǎn)： Using “will” to describe weather in the future.教學(xué)方法：對(duì)話(huà)、說(shuō)唱 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Warming up: Look say and act: hot

cold rain sunny

snow

windy(復(fù)習(xí)學(xué)過(guò)的有關(guān)天氣的形容詞，為本課的學(xué)習(xí)打好基礎(chǔ)）

（二）探究新知Presentation:

Show a map pf China.Write city’s name on the map.Show the cards of weather to students.And listen to the tape then point to the pictures.Draw the simple pictures on the board.And write the words.Learn the words and draw the pictures in the exercise books.(同時(shí)講解 rain與 rainy 的區(qū)分)Show the robot to the students and say “The robots will do everything.So the robots will broadcast the weather, too.Now let’s act.Listen again and repeat the text then act(表演機(jī)器人天氣預(yù)報(bào)員，以小組的形式操練句型)Show CAI to students.(看課件，模仿并跟讀，引出本課的重點(diǎn)句子，板書(shū)句子。)

（三）鞏固新知Practice: Game: Listen and stick.Listen to tape and stick the cards on map.（聽(tīng)一聽(tīng)，貼一貼的活動(dòng)調(diào)動(dòng)了學(xué)生的積極性，訓(xùn)練了學(xué)生的聽(tīng)做能力。它是讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)到某地的天氣情況，把相關(guān)的圖片與城市連在一起。）

Do this game in groups or in pairs.Do the exercises in AB.(4)Production: Look at the CAI and ask ―What will the weather be?‖

（出示各種天氣的課件，展開(kāi)游戲，讓學(xué)生運(yùn)用 “Will it ______________? ” 來(lái)提問(wèn)。）

In groups or in pairs to continue the game.（四）作業(yè)布置Homework :

（五）小結(jié)：?jiǎn)柼鞖馇闆rWill it be _________? 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Design:

Unit 2 Will it be hot in Haikou? hot cold

Will it be _______in_________? sunny

Yes, it will./ No, it won’t.rain windy snow 課后反思：

Module 5

Unit1 I was two then.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

The Ss can describe the past.Using the simple past tense.They were young then.I was two then.The Ss can grasp the new words and phrases.Using the simple past tense of the irregular verb ―be‖ to talk about the past.Cultivate the Ss’ cooperation.過(guò)程與方法：講授、接觸過(guò)去時(shí)

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：看圖回憶過(guò)去 德育目標(biāo)：有個(gè)家真好

重點(diǎn)：The Ss can grasp the new words and phrases.難點(diǎn)：Using the simple past tense of the irregular verb “be” to talk about the past.教學(xué)方法：講授、接觸過(guò)去時(shí) 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Sing the song

“OH, we love holidays.”(調(diào)動(dòng)學(xué)生的學(xué)習(xí)興趣，營(yíng)造英語(yǔ)教學(xué)氣氛)Review some adjectives.E.g.tall, short;fat, thin;big, small etc.Have the Ss make the sentences with the pictures.(為后面的課文教學(xué)做鋪墊)3.Free talk

Have the Ss talk about countries and their capitals(the USA an d China)

（二）探究新知Leading Take out a photo of my family.Then introduce it.―It’s old.Because I was four then.Look, there are my parents.They were young then.But now they are old.‖ Point to me and say ―I was fat and short then.Now you can look at me.‖ Then get the Ss to look at today’s story.(教師可以通過(guò)肢體語(yǔ)言及神情讓學(xué)生領(lǐng)會(huì)這段英語(yǔ)的意思。)Write the sentences on the board.And mark ―were, are, was, is‖ ╱They were young then.╱ I was four then.╲They are old now.╲ Now I am thirty.Explain to the Ss.We usually use “were, was” when it’s the past.And using “are, is” when we describe the present.(板書(shū)明確，再通過(guò)句式操練，學(xué)生更容易理解，并加深印象。)3.Teach the words with the pictures.Then have the Ss say the sentences with the wards.―Grandparents are grandma and grandpa.‖

e.g.―Who are they? They are my grandparents.‖ Compare ―now‖ and ―then‖.Then say the sentences.Teach ―hair‖ with pointing to Ss’ hair.Explain ―Cute means very lovely‖

Listen to the tape.Then repeat.Have the Ss act out the story in groups.（三）鞏固新知Point and say.Using the multi-media.Have the Ss look at the pictures.Then say the sentences with the present and the past tense.(教師運(yùn)用多媒體課件教學(xué)，讓學(xué)生感知語(yǔ)言?xún)?nèi)容，調(diào)動(dòng)學(xué)生的視、聽(tīng)覺(jué)，參與學(xué)習(xí)中來(lái)。)2.Do the Activity Book.Tell the Ss to bring a photo of themselves or their relatives to class.The photo should show them or their relatives when they were young.Then have the Ss come to the front to show and talk about their photos.（四）作業(yè)布置

（五）小結(jié)Read and write the new words and sentences.Do Activity III.板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Module5

Unit1

I was two then.grandparents ╱

╲ grandpa

grandma hair

then

so who/hu:/

me/ mi: /

Now Then Grandparents are old.Grandparents were young.Lingling’s hair is long.Lingling’s hair was short.Lingling isn’t two.Lingling was two.課后反思：

Uint2 They were young.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

Sentences: They weren’t old then.They were young.Grasp the simple past tense.And using the past tense to talk about some changes.Have the Ss say the chant.Have the Ss valve their time.過(guò)程與方法：講授、過(guò)去時(shí)

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：說(shuō)曾經(jīng)輝煌 德育目標(biāo)：用適當(dāng)?shù)男稳菰~修飾

重點(diǎn)：Sentences: They weren’t old then.They were young.難點(diǎn)：Grasp the simple past tense.And using the past tense to talk about some changes.教學(xué)方法：講授、過(guò)去時(shí) 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Have the Ss retell the story.Check up Ss’ homework.(Activity IV)

Get the Ss to act out the dialogue.(Have the Ss interest in English)

（二）探究新知Leading

Describe the photos or pictures with comparing the present and the past.Tell the Ss ―wasn’t‖and ―was not‖ are the same.And ―weren’t‖ is the same as ―were not‖.Play the tape and have the Ss listen and find out the adjectives.And report them.(Review the adjectives and find out the differences)

Learn the chant.First, get the Ss to look at the pictures and describe them.(A small chick and two big fat hens.)Then play the spoken version of the chant and get the Ss to repeat the words then chant.（三）鞏固新知Listen and repeat.Chant and do the mimes at the same time.Have the Ss do Activity IV.Look at the pictures.Compare ―now‖ and ―then‖.Then describe the pictures.(Cultivate the Ss’ oral English.)

4.Do the Activity Book.Have the Ss work in groups.Sa will act out Sb who was in many years ago.Then Sc will introduce the two Ss.Find out some changes with the past and present tense.（四）作業(yè)布置

（五）小結(jié)：接觸一般過(guò)去時(shí) 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)

Unit2 They were young.They weren’t old then.weren't →were not They were young.wasn't → was not

A: Was it fat?

B: No, it wasn’t.It’s thin.課后反思：

Module 6 Unit 1

Were you at home yesterday? 教學(xué)目標(biāo)：

知識(shí)與技能：Words and phrases: oldolder

youngyounger

strongstronger

than 2﹑Sentences: Samˊshorter than Lingling.3﹑Grammar: Adj.comparison 過(guò)程與方法： 單詞、課文和句型

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：對(duì)一類(lèi)的人或物進(jìn)行對(duì)比 德育目標(biāo)：對(duì)比是用確切的語(yǔ)言、特別是形容詞的用法

重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: oldolder

youngyounger

strongstronger

than Sentences: Samˊshorter than Lingling.難點(diǎn)：Grammar: Adj.comparison 教學(xué)方法：講述、對(duì)話(huà)、對(duì)比 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：A: song: Monday Tuesday B: Free talk: Talk about two students like this: Lili is fat, Zhaoxin is thin.（二）探究新知Write the adj.of the students using on the blackboard.(big small fat thin tall short)Then tell students the adj.what we'll learn.Write them on the blackboard: Old

Young

Strong Learn to read and make sentences like this(Fengqi is strong.Zhongyao is old.)Then let 2 students stand up, Then say :(Fengqi is strong, Wang kunpeng is stronger.)Write ―er‖ behind strong.Students will understand the meaning.Make sentences like this.(Wang kunpeng is stronger than Fengqi.)(Xiaoxiao is younger than Lili.)(Lili is older than Xiaoxiao.)Show out the picture of Amy and Lingling, and handwriting: ―Module 5 Unit 1 Amy's taller than Lingling.‖

Show out two bags and let Ss make sentences with(bigger than).Show out two rulers and use(longer than).（三）鞏固新知A game: Make more sentences about everything.(Eyes hands books and so on.)(Step 3)Practise:(Exercise 1 of Activity Book.Talk about pictures and Ss.)

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：形容詞比較級(jí)和句型：I am taller than Tom.板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Designs:

Unit 1 Were you at home yesterday? older

bigger younger

smaller stronger

fatter thinner

taller

shorter

Unit 2 Was it a big city then? 教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

Words and phrases: Mount Qomolangma

the Great Wall

the Summer Palace Sentences: The Changjiang River is longer than the Yellow River.過(guò)程與方法：看圖說(shuō)句子

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：對(duì)兩個(gè)同一類(lèi)的東西進(jìn)行對(duì)比 德育目標(biāo)：認(rèn)識(shí)我國(guó)大河江山、從對(duì)比中發(fā)現(xiàn)她的美

重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: Mount Qomolangma

the Great Wall

the Summer Palace 難點(diǎn)：Sentences: The Changjiang River is longer than the Yellow River.教學(xué)方法：對(duì)比 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：songs: Will it be windy? Free talk: talk about two Ss

（二）探究新知new concepts:(Step1).Draw a Chinese map on the blackboard.Point to Beijing and Tianjin, and then talk what is bigger.Handwriting:(Unit 2 Beijing is bigger than Tianjin.)Then let Ss try to say out the same meaning sentence.(Tianjin is smaller than Beijing.)Point to Mount Qomolangma and Mount Tai, talk and write:(Mount Qomolangma is higher than Mount Tai.)(Mount Tai is lower than the Mount Qomolangma.)Point to the Changjiang River and the Yellow River, talk and say:(The Changjiang River is longer than the Yellow River.)And the other sentence(The Yellow River is shorter than the Changjiang River.)Show out the pictures of the Great Wall and the Summer Palace.Look and learn.Then talk:(The Great Wall is older than the Summer Palace.)Listen and read the lesson.（三）鞏固新知(Step 2)Make more sentences, talk about(Beijing and Shanghai Snake and chameleon?)(Step 3)listen and learn the poem.(Listen 3 times and try to chant.)Then have a race between two groups, and say out― Which group is goodbetterworse.‖ Write ―good

better worse‖on the blackboard.Let Ss try to say them.（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：對(duì)兩個(gè)同一類(lèi)的東西進(jìn)行對(duì)比，用正確的形容詞比較級(jí)句型 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Designs:

Unit 2 Was it a big city then? Mount Qomolangma is higher than Mount Tai.The Changjiang River is longer than the Yellow River.The Great Wall is older than the Summer Palace.(good

better worse)課后反思：

Review Module Review from Module1 to Module3（復(fù)習(xí)模塊）

Module 1 教學(xué)目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：談?wù)擖c(diǎn)餐和就餐的情況。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：激發(fā)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的興趣，讓學(xué)生在輕松、愉快的氣氛中學(xué)到知識(shí)。

情感態(tài)度：營(yíng)造一個(gè)寬松、民主、和諧的教學(xué)氛圍，使學(xué)生形成積極的學(xué)習(xí)態(tài)度。

教學(xué)重點(diǎn)：

1、操練句型 “What do you want? I want??” “How much is it? It’s ??”

2、操練如何在快餐店里點(diǎn)餐。

教學(xué)難點(diǎn)：

1、句型 “I want??”

2、正確運(yùn)用“What do you want? I want??” “How much is it? It’s ??” 針對(duì)本模塊的教學(xué)重難點(diǎn)，主要是通過(guò)擬真情境讓學(xué)生在民主和諧氛圍的環(huán)境中學(xué)習(xí)，可以設(shè)計(jì)以下兩個(gè)活動(dòng)進(jìn)行操練：

活動(dòng)1：“快樂(lè)的服務(wù)員”，地點(diǎn)可高計(jì)為在一個(gè)宴會(huì)上。請(qǐng)一名同學(xué)當(dāng)服務(wù)員，端著拖盤(pán)到同學(xué)中間有禮貌的問(wèn)另一名同學(xué)“What do you want to eat /drink?待該同學(xué)回答后，將拖盤(pán)交給他，再由他去問(wèn)另一名同學(xué)。這樣循環(huán)下去讓更多的同學(xué)莃得操練的機(jī)會(huì)。

活動(dòng)2：教師出示一些食物卡片，進(jìn)行“幸運(yùn)猜價(jià)”的活動(dòng)，卡片的后面標(biāo)有價(jià)格，讓學(xué)生問(wèn)“How much is it ?”另一名學(xué)生來(lái)答。

Module2 教學(xué)目標(biāo)：

知識(shí)與能力目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：談?wù)撘鈭D和計(jì)劃。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：制定并能講述自己的計(jì)劃。

情感態(tài)度：通過(guò)踴躍參與，形成積極的學(xué)習(xí)態(tài)度。

教學(xué)重點(diǎn)： 操練句型 “will ??”

教學(xué)難點(diǎn)：

句型 “It’s going to ? in ?

和

It’s going to be in ?...”

針對(duì)本課的重難點(diǎn)，可以采取讓學(xué)生造句的形式進(jìn)行操練，如教師說(shuō)I am going to swim.讓學(xué)生接著說(shuō)，盡量不重復(fù)；也可以讓學(xué)生在句子中加上be going to，進(jìn)行操練，如He /go to the park 變成He is going to go to the park。

活動(dòng)：做課堂練習(xí)冊(cè)并講解 Module 3 教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與能力目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：學(xué)習(xí)描述照片或圖片中的活動(dòng)情景。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的觀察能力和表演能力。

情感態(tài)度：把英語(yǔ)教學(xué)同日常生活相結(jié)合，讓學(xué)生體驗(yàn)生活，通過(guò)書(shū)信，結(jié)交更多的朋友。

教學(xué)重點(diǎn)：

操練現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)時(shí)態(tài)。

教學(xué)難點(diǎn)：一般將來(lái)時(shí)態(tài)的構(gòu)成。

針對(duì)本模塊的重難點(diǎn)，教學(xué)時(shí)可以請(qǐng)同學(xué)邊做動(dòng)作邊說(shuō)出和動(dòng)作相應(yīng)的現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)的句子，看誰(shuí)說(shuō)的有效句子最多為獲勝，教師可以請(qǐng)全班同學(xué)做裁判。或者是教師準(zhǔn)備一些字條，字條上標(biāo)有動(dòng)作內(nèi)容，教師請(qǐng)某個(gè)或某些個(gè)同學(xué)到前面抽取字條，并根據(jù)字條內(nèi)容做模擬動(dòng)作，教師或同學(xué)提問(wèn)：“What are they doing? What is XX doing? ”同學(xué)根據(jù)動(dòng)作回答問(wèn)題。

活動(dòng)：做課堂練習(xí)冊(cè)并講解

作業(yè)布置Homework：會(huì)讀、寫(xiě)這三模塊的單詞，會(huì)運(yùn)用三模塊的重點(diǎn)句型，注意復(fù)習(xí)、下節(jié)課聽(tīng)寫(xiě)和造句。

Review Module Review from Module4 to Module6（復(fù)習(xí)模塊）

Module 4

知識(shí)與能力目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：能描述正在發(fā)生的事情。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：用正在進(jìn)行時(shí)講述正在發(fā)生的事情，能用can談?wù)撃芰拖蛩颂峁椭那闆r。

情感態(tài)度：鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生設(shè)計(jì)真實(shí)可信的場(chǎng)景，來(lái)尋求幫助或提供幫助，從小養(yǎng)成團(tuán)結(jié)友愛(ài)、互相幫助的好品質(zhì)。

教學(xué)重點(diǎn)：

1、復(fù)習(xí)情態(tài)動(dòng)詞can在各種情景中的正確使用。

2、正在進(jìn)行時(shí)的構(gòu)成。

教學(xué)難點(diǎn)：

學(xué)會(huì)使用Who can help me?

Sorry, I can’t.Yes, I can help you.針對(duì)本模塊的重難點(diǎn)，可以通過(guò)多種活動(dòng)，來(lái)引導(dǎo)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)，運(yùn)用現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)，讓學(xué)生將課堂所學(xué)應(yīng)用在生活中。如設(shè)計(jì)活動(dòng)“猜猜他（她）是誰(shuí)”讓學(xué)生說(shuō)出他的朋友或他的偶像能做些什么，通過(guò)所提示的一些特征，請(qǐng)同學(xué)們來(lái)猜猜他（她）是誰(shuí)，來(lái)操練can和can’t。

Module 5 知識(shí)與能力目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：談?wù)撜谧鲆患虑闀r(shí)另一件事情同時(shí)發(fā)生。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：用正在進(jìn)行時(shí)講述正在發(fā)生的事情。

情感態(tài)度：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生處理問(wèn)題的能力。

教學(xué)重點(diǎn)： 正在進(jìn)行時(shí)的構(gòu)成。

教學(xué)難點(diǎn)：

能用進(jìn)行時(shí)描述正在做一件事情時(shí)另一件事情同時(shí)發(fā)生。

在教學(xué)時(shí)，主要還是對(duì)進(jìn)行時(shí)的時(shí)態(tài)進(jìn)行重點(diǎn)的操練，如教師將班里同學(xué)分成3組，請(qǐng)三組同學(xué)在紙條寫(xiě)出人物、做什么、地點(diǎn)，分別投進(jìn)前面的三個(gè)箱子里，然后請(qǐng)同學(xué)自愿到前面在每個(gè)箱子里抽出一張紙條，根據(jù)紙條內(nèi)容快速說(shuō)出句子。也可以讓學(xué)生說(shuō)說(shuō)發(fā)生在自己身上的事，當(dāng)自己在做一件什么事時(shí)，另一件事也同時(shí)發(fā)生。

Module 6 知識(shí)與能力目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：能談?wù)撨^(guò)去發(fā)生的事情。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：能談?wù)撨^(guò)去發(fā)生的事情。學(xué)習(xí)如何用英語(yǔ)來(lái)表達(dá)贈(zèng)送和接受禮物。

情感態(tài)度：鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生之間應(yīng)該團(tuán)結(jié)、友愛(ài)。

教學(xué)重難點(diǎn)：

過(guò)去式的構(gòu)成。

針對(duì)本模塊的重難點(diǎn)，要讓學(xué)生掌握動(dòng)詞過(guò)去式的規(guī)則變化及不規(guī)則變化，在操練時(shí)可以通過(guò) talk about the picture進(jìn)行談?wù)撨^(guò)去發(fā)生的事情。

課后反思：

Module 7

Unit 1 I helped Mum.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能： 1.I helped Mum.2.Did you cook meat yesterday? Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t.1.Talk about the action or event in the past.2.Understand the sentence ―Did you cook meat yesterday?‖ and answer correctly.3.Use the past tense to explain the actions in oral.過(guò)程與方法：講授、過(guò)去時(shí) 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：有空幫媽媽

德育目標(biāo)：Have the students understand the differences between Chinese languages and foreign languages.重點(diǎn)：1.words: phone, yesterday, day.2.the past form of the verbs: help—helped, cook—cooked, walk—walked, talk—talked, watch—watched, listen—listened.3.Grammer: the past tense 難點(diǎn)：the usage of the past tense 教學(xué)方法：講授、過(guò)去時(shí)

教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Warm up

T: Hello, boys and girls.Today we are going to learn Module 9 Unit1 I helped Mum.First, let’s sing a song, OK?

Ss: OK.(Ss sing the song ―OH, we love holidays.‖)T: Now who can compare yourself now and past? Several students compare themselves.According to this practice to review the past tense.（二）探究新知Leading T: Today, we will go on learning the past tense in Module 9 Unit1.Amy phoned her grandma in England.They talked about their last weekend.Do you know how to describe the things in the past? Let’s look together, and then please talk about you what you did last weekend.New Concepts Teacher do the actions and say: ―I played basketball yesterday.‖ for several times.Then write played on the board.Teacher asks one student: ―Did you played basketball yesterday?‖ and help them answer ―Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t.‖ Write these sentences on the board.Play the tape and have them underline ―did‖ ―didn’t‖ and the words that add –ed.Teacher explains how to change the past tense of verbs.Play the tape again and have them read.（三）鞏固新知Practice T: Search your friends what did they do yesterday.Please make a table just like the table in the book.(Students make a table and use the past tense to inquire their friends what did they do yesterday.)T: Now let’s play a game ―Find friends‖

Teacher takes out some cards, there are some verbs and their past tense forms on it.One student should find its correct past tense form and say: ―We are friends.‖

In this way, they can review the past tense form of the verbs.T: OK.Good boy.You do very well.（四）作業(yè)布置Homework

（五）小結(jié)：

板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Design of the blackboard

Module 7 Unit1 I helped Mum.Did you play basketball yesterday?

Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t.Unit 2 Grandma cooked fish? 教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能： Vocabulary: him laugh dance stop last 2 Sentences:

Did Dad cook lunch? Yes, he did./ No, he didn’t.3 Grammar: using the past tense.過(guò)程與方法：講授、過(guò)去時(shí)

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀： 德育目標(biāo)：感受家庭的溫暖 重點(diǎn)：him laugh dance stop last Did Dad cook lunch? Yes, he did./ No, he didn’t.難點(diǎn)：using the past tense.教學(xué)方法：講授、過(guò)去時(shí) 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Warming up

T: Hi, boys and girls!Yesterday I talked with my friends and I watched TV.What about you? Did you watch TV yesterday? S1: Yes, I did.T: Did you listen to music yesterday? S2: No, I didn’t

T: Did you clean the house? S3: Yes, I did.T: What did they do yesterday? Point and say(show the 6 pictures on page 35)(screen)S1: Grandma cooked fish

（二）探究新知Review and leading

?Let’s come to the Smarts.What are they in their family? What did they do yesterday? Are you clear? Listen to the tape and repeat(CAI)Listen to the tape and answer the questions.S1: Answer the questions.3 New concepts ?T: Now this class we’re going to learn Module 9 Unit 2 Did Dad cook lunch? Pair work Talk about the pictures on page 36(CAI)S1: Did Dad cook noodles yesterday? S2: Yes, he did.Complete Ex 1 Listen and match

Ask some students to give the similar questions.S1: Ask S2: Answer.?Find out the past tense of the verbs, Underline the past verbs.Read the verbs after the teacher.Which is new word? Ask students to point out.S1: Point out the new words.Learn to say the new words(cards).Then listen, say and chant.（三）鞏固新知Practice

?Talk about something about your last weekend.S1: I talked with my grandma last weekend.S2: I played football last weekend.S3: I …

?Let’s play a game.Guess what he/she did last weekend? S1: Last weekend, I …

S2: Did you play tennis last weekend? S1: No, I didn’t.S3: Did you watch TV last weekend? S1: No, I didn’t.S4: Did you play football last weekend? S1: Yes, I did.David 8 groups to play the game.Complete Ex 3 at the same time.（四）作業(yè)布置Homework

（五）小結(jié)：一般過(guò)去時(shí)的基本用法 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Designs of the blackboard

Unit 2 Grandma cooked fish? Did Dad cook lunch? Yes, he did.No, he didn’t.課后反思：

Module 8

Unit 1 They sang beautiful.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

Words and phrases: better worse voice think first agree quiet Sentences: I think this girl is better than the first girl.grammar: adj.comparison 過(guò)程與方法： 單詞、課文和造句

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：用形容詞比較級(jí)不規(guī)則形式進(jìn)行對(duì)比 德育目標(biāo)：在任何時(shí)候都不能欺騙別人、撒謊是最可恥的行為 重點(diǎn)：better worse voice think first agree quiet 難點(diǎn)：

Sentences: I think this girl is better than the first girl.grammar: adj.comparison 教學(xué)方法：講授、領(lǐng)讀、對(duì)話(huà) 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入： songs: Polly’s hair-Free talk: talk about the things on the map.（二）探究新知new concepts:(Step 1).Let a girl sings an English song, and writes ―the girl is good.‖ on the blackboard.Then write ―better

bad-worse I think I agree voice first‖ on the blackboard.And learn how to pronounce and how to use.Make sentences with every word.(Free talk): Let another girl sing a song, and say ―the girl is better than the first girl.‖ Please talk about them, and then answer the questions: 1.―Who is better?‖ 2.What do you think? 3.Do you agree? Listen to the tape and practise reading this lesson.（三）鞏固新知

(Step 2)Look at the Activity Book and complete it.(Practise using better and worse)(Step 3).A game: Draw and talk.(Let two Ss draw pictures on the blackboard and we talk about them like step 1.（四）作業(yè)布置:

（五）小結(jié): 用形容詞比較級(jí)不規(guī)則形式進(jìn)行對(duì)比 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)

Module 8

Unit 1 They sang beautiful.good—better

I think_____________.bad---worse

I agree.voice Be quiet.I think this girl is better than the first girl.Unit 2 I took some pictures.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

Words and phrases: zither guitar

drums pop music Sentences: the new song 過(guò)程與方法： 不規(guī)則形容詞比較級(jí)講授 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：激發(fā)學(xué)生對(duì)音樂(lè)的愛(ài)好 德育目標(biāo)：任何人都有他的優(yōu)點(diǎn)和缺點(diǎn)、因此不要泄氣、也不要驕傲 重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: zither guitar

drums pop music 難點(diǎn)：Sentences: the new song 教學(xué)方法：講授、對(duì)比 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

Songs: London Bridge is falling down.Free talk: let 2 students sing songs, and talk about them.（二）探究新知new concepts:(Step 1)Ask students: ―Do you like music?‖ Today we will learn about music.Write the title ―Unit 2 Lingling is better than Daming.‖on the blackboard.Write― Chinese music and pop music‖ on the blackboard.Talk about― what is Chinese music and what is pop music.‖

Write them on the blackboard.(erhu zither and piano guitar drums violin)Let Ss make sentences and act.For example: I can play the erhu.(The student do the actions and say.)(Must write ―the‖before the instrument)

Then ask Ss: ―What music do you like?‖―What can you play?‖ “Can you play the zither?‖

Choose two Ss whom can play the same instrument, Let them play or act and then we talk about ―who is better? and who is worse?‖

Listen to the tape and practise reading this lesson.（三）鞏固新知

(Step 2)Listen to the tape and learn to sing the new song.Listen to music more times, and then try to sing the song together.(Step 3)Free talk.Let Ss sing the song in groups, and we talk which group is better.Let Ss do the actions for the song, and we talk which group is better or worse.（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：不規(guī)則形容詞比較級(jí)講授、主要是better和worse的用法 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)

Unit 2 I took some pictures.Chinese music

Pop music erhu

guitar zither

drums Piano Violin 課后反思：

Module 9

Unit 1 Did he live in New York? 教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

Key words and phrases :country project also call speak right city cousin there Sentences: San Francisco is in the west.Task aim: Learn about the cities of America.And grasp the position words.Use the simple sentences to describe the position of something.過(guò)程與方法： 單詞、課文、對(duì)比

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：美國(guó)三大主要城市的地理位置 德育目標(biāo)：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的方向感

重點(diǎn)：Key words and phrases :country project also call speak right city cousin there Sentences: San Francisco is in the west.難點(diǎn)：Learn about the cities of America.And grasp the position words.Use the simple sentences to describe the position of something.教學(xué)方法：講授、對(duì)比 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

Sing the song together.‖I am the music man.‖(construct funny atmosphere)Show some pictures or maps about London.Free talk(Have students describe the picture)(review and present the new lesson)

（二）探究新知Teacher’s Q: Which countries speak English/ S: England, American…

Q: What do you know about America? S: In Chinese they may say something about it.OK, today let’s do it in English.Show a map of America.(Teacher draw it before the class)

And introduce ―This is my project.It about America‖(show ―project…)read it and understand it.b.Use questions to show new words Q: what language do the people speak in America? S: people speak English in America.Q: what’s the capital of America?

S: Washington D.C is the capital of the USA.Q: where is it? S: It’s in the east.New words :speak , east

c.Use the map to show the position of New York and San Francisco.And present the text contest on the blackboard.(teach new words ― city , west , cousin)

d.Make sure that all the contest on the blackboard and use a color chalk underline the new words.Listen and repeat.And read it in pairs.Repeat some key sentences with a teacher.Understand the meaning of it.Competition between two students.Read it ―Who can read it more quickly?‖(Improve the students ability of oral English)

（三）鞏固新知

Do you have a friend? If you have, please draw her / his house.And tell us where is his / her house?(Practice ―I live in Beijing.My friend lives in …)Give them 2’ to remember the new words and the meaning of it.Then finish the part 1 on Activity book.Check the answer in groups

Point ,ask and answer

Show some pictures on TV.(on the blackboard)A: Where is New York? B: It’s in the east.(Look at pictures and describe the position of it)

3.Show a map of China and deal with the part 3 on activity book

（四）作業(yè)布置

（五）小結(jié)Practice to read and remember the new words.(look at the phonetic symbol and say them out)Important sentences(make a simple translation)板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)

Unit 1 Did he live in New York?

It’s about America.It’s called USA.Unite 2 Did you have a nice holidy? 教學(xué)目標(biāo)； 知識(shí)與技能：

a.Key words and phrases: north, south b.Sentences: Beijing is the capital of China.c.Task aim: 1.Go on learning the position words, Learn about China and America from this.2.Introduce some cities position and choose some cities to practice.過(guò)程與方法： 課文、方向、對(duì)比

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：對(duì)美國(guó)和中國(guó)兩大國(guó)家進(jìn)行對(duì)比 德育目標(biāo)：了解中國(guó)地理和國(guó)情 重點(diǎn)：Key words and phrases: north, south

Sentences: Beijing is the capital of China.難點(diǎn)：Task aim: 1.Go on learning the position words, Learn about China and America from this.2.Introduce some cities position and choose some cities to practice.教學(xué)方法：講授、對(duì)比 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：1.Singing a song together.Choose your favorite country and describe it(position capital nice city)Teacher shows the picture of Beijing, Sanya, Washington, and San Francisco on TV.（二）探究新知Q: Do you like Beijing? And look at it S: Describe it(position…)

Q: There is a famous city in China, What is it / It’s very hot.S: Sanya and describe it.And use the same way to show Washington(to teach north, south, east, and west)We can use a map to learn four words.Listen and match.Then point and say(consolidate to remember the four position words)Finish the part 1on Activity book.Give them 2’ to remember the new words and the meaning of it.Then finish the part 1 on Activity book.Check the answer in groups Point ,ask and answer

Show some pictures on TV.(on the blackboard)

（三）鞏固新知A: Where is New York? B: It’s in the east.(Look at pictures and describe the position of it)Show a map of China and deal with the part 3 on activity book.Do you have a friend? If you have, please draw her / his house.And tell us where is his / her house?(Practice ―I live in Beijing.My friend lives in …)

（四）作業(yè)布置

（五）小結(jié)

1.Practice to read and remember the new words.(look at the phonetic symbol and say them out)2.Important sentences(make a simple translation)板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)

Unite 2 Did you have a nice holidy? 課后反思：

Module 10 Unit 1 Did you fall off your bike? 教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

1.Words and phrases: happen ride then thirsty watermelon carry bump 2.Sentences: Sam and I went for a bike ride yesterday.And then ……? 3.Past form of the verbs: happen---happened

bump---bumped

carry---carried go---went

are---were

buy------bought

fall-----fell 過(guò)程與方法：有趣的引導(dǎo)

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：通過(guò)有趣的課文內(nèi)容讓學(xué)生更加強(qiáng)過(guò)去式 德育目標(biāo)：指出因果關(guān)系 重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: happen ride then thirsty watermelon carry bump 難點(diǎn)：Sentences: Sam and I went for a bike ride yesterday.And then ……? 3.Past form of the verbs: happen---happened

bump---bumped

carry---carried go---went

are---were

buy------bought

fall-----fell 教學(xué)方法：引導(dǎo)、鞏固 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

A Songs: Oh, we love holidays.B Free talk: I did ……yesterday.（二）探究新知New concepts: Warming up

On the cards, write the present and past tense forms of some irregular verbs.Examples: go---went

are---were

buy---bought

fall-----fell T: Today, We’ll learn the new verbs and their past tense forms.Then teach: happen----happened bump-----bumped carry-----carried Ask and answer

T: We did many things yesterday.Who can tell me who you did yesterday? T: What did you do yesterday, A? Sa: I played basketball yesterday.T: What did Sa do yesterday? Sb: He/She played basketball yesterday.Then ask several the other students like this.Tell the story : T: Now, look at your books.Module 10 Accidents Unit 1 Sam fell of his bike.Listen to the tape and underline the new words.(Show the cards of new words)Teach the new words.T: Now listen to the tape again and repeat it.Are you clear? T: Now listen to the tape again and answer: What did Sam and Daming do yesterday? Ask students to look at the CAI S1: They went for a bike ride yesterday.T: And then ……?(Ask students to look at the CAI and answer)

（三）鞏固新知Read

Ask students to use all kinds of ways to read the text well.Tell the story

Ask students to look at the CAI and tell the story.For example: T: Sam and Daming went for a bile ride yesterday.T: And then……?

S1: They were hungry and thirsty.S2 :And then ??？ S3: They bought a watermelon.??

（四）作業(yè)布置Homework

（五）小結(jié)：復(fù)習(xí)鞏固過(guò)去時(shí) 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Designs of the blackboard

Module 10

Unit 1 Did you fall off your bike? Cards: happen ride

then

thirsty watermelon carry(1)happen---happened

bump---bumped(2)carry---carried(3)go---went

are---were

buy---bought

fall---fell 課后反思： Unit 2 Sam had lots of chocolate.教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 知識(shí)與技能：

Words and phrases: stomachache, cold, headache, fever, fall off, fell off.2.Sentences: Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits yesterday.So today he’s got a stomachache.3.Grammar: Talking about illnesses.過(guò)程與方法：講授、過(guò)去時(shí)

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：有時(shí)干家務(wù)也挺好的

bump

德育目標(biāo)：勞動(dòng)光榮

重點(diǎn)：Words and phrases: stomachache, cold, headache, fever, fall off, fell off.難點(diǎn)：Sentences: Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits yesterday.So today he’s got a stomachache.3.Grammar: Talking about illnesses.教學(xué)方法：講授、過(guò)去時(shí) 教學(xué)過(guò)程：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Step 1 Warm-up T: Hi, boys and girls.T: Let’s sing a song, ok? Ss: Ok.T: Ok!London Bridge is falling down….(Ss sing the song)

T: You are clever boys and girls.Now let’s have a Free Talk ―What I did yesterday‖, Ok? Ss introduce what they did yesterday

（二）探究新知Step 2 Presentation and leading T: Who can tell me what happen to Daming in last Unit.Ss: Daming’s head was bumped.T: Let’s play this story, ok? Ss: Ok.(Two students play in roles of ―Daming‖ and ―Sam‖, others describe the story, the two students do the actions)The teacher writes the word ―today‖ on the blackboard.What happened to Daming, Sam, Amy and Lingling? Lead the students to use ―to‖ and ―and‖ to connect the two sentences.Step 3 Text Teaching T: Now, this class we are going to learn Module 10 Unit 2 Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits.First, listen to the tape and underline the new words.(Teach the new words’ cards)

T: Now listen to the tape and repeat it.Are you clear?(The teacher writes these sentences on the blackboard)Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits yesterday.So today he’s got a stomachache.T: Now listen to the tape again and tell me what happened to Sam, Lingling, Amy and Lingling.T: Look at these words: had, ate

（三）鞏固新知Step 4 Task-Fulfilling T: Let’s play a game, ok? Ss: Ok.T: Let’s play ―I do you say‖.I’ll ask four students to come to the front of the class, one student performs Daming eating chocolate biscuits and then having a stomachache, and others describe it, and so on.Step 5 Text Learning T: Look at Part 4, answer these questions: What is wrong with Little Tommy? What’s wrong with Little Lingling? What’s wrong with Little Ben? T: Listen to the tape and repeat it.T: Let’s read the poem together and do the actions, ok? Ss: Ok.（四）作業(yè)布置Homework

（五）小結(jié)：過(guò)去時(shí)的用法 板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)Designs of the blackboard

Unit 2 Sam had lots of chocolate Sam had lots of chocolate biscuits yesterday.So today he’s got a stomachache.課后反思：

Review Module Review from Module7 to Module9（復(fù)習(xí)模塊）

Module 7 知識(shí)與能力目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：講述過(guò)去發(fā)生的事情。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：用過(guò)去時(shí)描述過(guò)去發(fā)生的事情。

情感態(tài)度：通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的愛(ài)國(guó)情操，發(fā)揚(yáng)民族自豪感。

教學(xué)重難點(diǎn)：

過(guò)去時(shí)的構(gòu)成。Module 8 知識(shí)與能力目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：談?wù)摶蛟?xún)問(wèn)某人過(guò)去的能力。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：能用could 及 couldn’t談?wù)撨^(guò)去的能力。

教學(xué)重難點(diǎn)：

過(guò)去時(shí)的構(gòu)成及could、couldn’t 的用法。

本模塊主要還是對(duì)過(guò)去時(shí)進(jìn)行操練，在教學(xué)時(shí)可讓學(xué)生拿出一些照片，對(duì)照片中的人物進(jìn)行討論，有could 及 couldn’t談?wù)撍麄冞^(guò)去的能力

Module 9

知識(shí)與能力目標(biāo)：

（1）知識(shí)目標(biāo)：詢(xún)問(wèn)原因及回答。

（2）能力目標(biāo)：學(xué)會(huì)如何詢(xún)問(wèn)原因及怎樣回答。

情感態(tài)度：激發(fā)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的興趣，讓學(xué)生在輕松愉快的氣氛中學(xué)到知識(shí)。

教學(xué)重點(diǎn)：

1、學(xué)會(huì)如何詢(xún)問(wèn)原因及怎樣回答。

2、用because回答別人有關(guān)原因的提問(wèn)。

教學(xué)難點(diǎn)：

用because回答別人有關(guān)原因的提問(wèn)。作業(yè)布置：

小結(jié)：鞏固是為了更好地學(xué)習(xí)課后反思：

第三篇：四年級(jí)新標(biāo)準(zhǔn)英語(yǔ)外研版上冊(cè)教案

Module 1 Unit 1 Go straight on.第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

---Where ' s the … please?

---Go straight on.Turn left.Turn right.road supermarket hill house station 過(guò)程與方法： Review the words about directions by game method.2 Teach the text with the task-based method.3 Do a survey by cooperative learning.情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：?jiǎn)柭凡⒛軠?zhǔn)確指明方向

【重點(diǎn)】：road supermarket hill house station 【難點(diǎn)】：---Where ' s the … please?---Go straight on.Turn left.Turn right.【教學(xué)方法】：講授 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：登山比賽摘蘋(píng)果：制作了各種動(dòng)物卡片，把全班學(xué)生分成兩個(gè)擂臺(tái)組，每組選兩名學(xué)生到黑板前，一個(gè)表演，一個(gè)說(shuō)英語(yǔ),用句型Have you got a tiger?Yes,I have.如果說(shuō)對(duì)了，就登一個(gè)臺(tái)階。誰(shuí)先登上山頂摘到蘋(píng)果，即為本次擂臺(tái)的擂主。

（設(shè)計(jì)說(shuō)明：這樣的游戲活動(dòng)，通過(guò)小組合作與對(duì)等性的競(jìng)爭(zhēng)，鞏固了上一節(jié)課有關(guān)動(dòng)物的單詞，學(xué)生興趣盎然。）

（二）探究新知：1．導(dǎo)入新課 點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示Beijing tian”anmen的圖片，告訴學(xué)生在北京我遇見(jiàn)一位外國(guó)人，用英語(yǔ)為他指路去天安門(mén)，我最棒。

Look at this picture,please.It is Beijing tiananmei.Beijing is very beautiful.Do you want to go?Class,I have been to Beijing.In Beijing,I met a foreigner.He did not know how to get to Beijing Tiananmen.I tell him the way.I am the best.Yes?In this class lets learn how to ask the way?點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示Ask the way.問(wèn)路And lets learn how to point the way? 點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示Point the way.指路Now class if you learn very well,you are the best.2.講授新課

A.點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示狗的圖片。Class,here is a dog.The dog is lost.lost the meaning :迷路。Nevermind,here is her address.點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示狗的地址:My name is Doudou.I live in No.2 West Lake Road.接著用單詞卡學(xué)習(xí)新單詞live,road.如live:I live in Chengbei?Where do you live? B.Chant: 點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示Chant:Lost,lost,lost.The dog is lost.Live,live,live.I live in West Lake Road.（設(shè)計(jì)意圖：通過(guò)韻律詩(shī)，操練單詞lost,live,road。此時(shí)chant的運(yùn)用使枯燥的機(jī)械操練變得不在單調(diào)和乏味。）

C.Lets help Doudou to find her house.Ok? Lets ask the way:Excuse me.Where is No.2West Lake Road,please? 在次領(lǐng)讀單詞Excuse me，并舉例：Excuse me.Where is the school/zoo/park,please? 點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示一個(gè)十字路口，隨著多媒體的顯示學(xué)習(xí)指路短語(yǔ)：go straight on,turn left,tyrn right.以及單詞supermarket D.Game:拔河比賽

把全班學(xué)生分成兩大組：left和right.游戲開(kāi)始時(shí)，一組的學(xué)生喊：left；另一組的學(xué)生喊：right；

E.Listen to the radio.Listen again and answer the questions.點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示

Questions: 1).How is the dog? 2).Where does the dog live? 3).Where is the No.2 West Lake Road? 3.角色表演

教師把頭飾交給學(xué)生，讓他們分別扮演Sam,Amy,dog,the old man,the dogs owner.(設(shè)計(jì)意圖：小學(xué)生想象力豐富，善于模仿，具有強(qiáng)烈的表現(xiàn)欲；教師讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行角色表演，可以調(diào)動(dòng)學(xué)生的學(xué)習(xí)積極性，使學(xué)生主動(dòng)參與教學(xué)活動(dòng)，大膽地說(shuō)和夸張地演。)4．任務(wù)完成

(1)讓學(xué)生到黑板前做指令性動(dòng)作，練習(xí)go straight on,turn left,turn right.(2)根據(jù)圖片1，2，3，小組合作問(wèn)路，指路。5．拓展新知

游戲：幫助盲人過(guò)馬路。點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體播放《愛(ài)的奉獻(xiàn)》。在背景音樂(lè)中幫助盲人過(guò)馬路。點(diǎn)擊課件，多媒體顯示：

Help people in trouble.Be full of love in world.（三）鞏固新知：A、游戲法區(qū)分 left/right。問(wèn)句“ Where ' s the … please? ”這一句子學(xué)生很快就能掌握，難點(diǎn)就在于學(xué)生能否靈活并準(zhǔn)確的作答。對(duì)于表示方位的單詞“ left ”“ right ”，學(xué)生最易混淆。那我們可將這兩個(gè)單詞放在一起比較練習(xí)。運(yùn)用一些小游戲，例如：）老師說(shuō)單詞，學(xué)生相應(yīng)舉起左手或右手。）老師藏一只鉛筆或其它東西在某一手中，問(wèn)“ Where ' s the pencil? ”，讓學(xué)生猜。）帶學(xué)生“開(kāi)火車(chē)”跳兔子舞。

B、貼圖游戲：訓(xùn)練學(xué)生熟悉地名并鞏固方向的表達(dá)。畫(huà)條十字路，老師收納幾張表示地方的卡片，要學(xué)生幫忙貼到正確的位置。引導(dǎo)學(xué)生發(fā)問(wèn)：“ Where is the … please? ”老師回答或請(qǐng)小老師來(lái)回答“ Go straight on.Turn left.It ' s on your right.”然后選學(xué)生上臺(tái)把圖片貼在正確的位置上。可結(jié)合 P8 的活動(dòng) 3 提供的小游戲進(jìn)行進(jìn)一步的鞏固練習(xí)，如有時(shí)間，可以跟學(xué)生玩一玩 P9 活動(dòng) 5 提供的小游戲： Listen and do, 尋找教室里的“寶藏”，在玩這個(gè)游戲的時(shí)候，我的學(xué)生們熱情特別高，甚至不由自主地也當(dāng)起了“指路員”，很快熟悉了這幾個(gè)短語(yǔ)。

C、課時(shí)安排。這個(gè)模塊兩個(gè)單元的教學(xué)，大概需要花費(fèi)兩個(gè)課時(shí)，而在第四個(gè)課時(shí)里，可以進(jìn)行各種任務(wù)型游戲活動(dòng)及兒歌的表演，如剛說(shuō)的貼圖游戲。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：學(xué)會(huì)了方位短語(yǔ)，練習(xí)口語(yǔ)化交流

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Module 2 Directions Unit 1 Go straight on Road supermarket hill house station---Where ' s the … please?---Go straight on.Turn left.Turn right.Module 1 Unit 2 It’s at the station.第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：the key words: up down near at 過(guò)程與方法：運(yùn)用探究合作的學(xué)習(xí)方法，激發(fā)學(xué)生興趣 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：培養(yǎng)學(xué)英語(yǔ)的興趣

【重點(diǎn)】：the key words: up down near at 【難點(diǎn)】：正確使用方位介詞描述簡(jiǎn)單的位置關(guān)系 【教學(xué)方法】：講授、游戲 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入： 1． Warm—up 當(dāng)老師走進(jìn)教室時(shí)，仍然利用第7頁(yè)活動(dòng)三來(lái)幫助同學(xué)們回顧所學(xué)的知識(shí)，大面積的提問(wèn)同學(xué)，營(yíng)造良好的英語(yǔ)氛圍。

2.Leading-up

根據(jù)上節(jié)課布置的課后作業(yè)，點(diǎn)名部分同學(xué)或者小組進(jìn)行展示，既可以復(fù)習(xí)所學(xué)知識(shí)，檢查課后作業(yè)，又可以引出導(dǎo)入我們新課的教學(xué)。檢查完畢后，教師說(shuō)，Let’s listen to the tape, and find out where the train is.（二）探究新知：活動(dòng)1 listen and point 1,播放錄音，學(xué)生聆聽(tīng)，錄音，學(xué)生聆聽(tīng)，并且找到所讀句子。學(xué)生自讀課文，播放錄音，學(xué)生聆聽(tīng)，并且跟讀。學(xué)生自讀課文

underline the key words: up down near at 學(xué)生互相檢查朗讀課文 活動(dòng)3 在了解了活動(dòng)的要求之后，給同學(xué)或者小組3-5分鐘的時(shí)間進(jìn)行準(zhǔn)備，然后教師可以以小組積分的形式鼓勵(lì)同學(xué)們積極發(fā)言。

活動(dòng)4，poem previse listen and point again listen and sing along again listen and sing loudly and do some actions

（三）鞏固新知：

帶學(xué)生“開(kāi)火車(chē)”跳兔子舞。

貼圖游戲：訓(xùn)練學(xué)生熟悉地名并鞏固方向的表達(dá)。畫(huà)條十字路，老師收納幾張表示地方的卡片，要學(xué)生幫忙貼到正確的位置。引導(dǎo)學(xué)生發(fā)問(wèn)：“ Where is the … please? ”老師回答或請(qǐng)小老師來(lái)回答“ Go straight on.Turn left.It ' s on your right.”然后選學(xué)生上臺(tái)把圖片貼在正確的位置上?？山Y(jié)合 P8 的活動(dòng) 3 提供的小游戲進(jìn)行進(jìn)一步的鞏固練習(xí)，如有時(shí)間，可以跟學(xué)生玩一玩 P9 活動(dòng) 5 提供的小游戲： Listen and do, 尋找教室里的“寶藏”，在玩這個(gè)游戲的時(shí)候，我的學(xué)生們熱情特別高，甚至不由自主地也當(dāng)起了“指路員”，很快熟悉了這幾個(gè)短語(yǔ)。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：利用課文中的句子，解釋指路和問(wèn)路的過(guò)程當(dāng)中應(yīng)當(dāng)注意的問(wèn)題、常用的句型、以及禮貌用語(yǔ)等問(wèn)題

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Unit 2 It's at the station.road supermarket hill house station

（七）課后反思：

Module 2 Unit 1 She’s reading a book.第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生用英語(yǔ)進(jìn)行交流，養(yǎng)成用英語(yǔ)思維的良好習(xí)慣，提高學(xué)生的創(chuàng)造力和實(shí)踐能力。

句型： 1)---What are you doing?---I ' m … 2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is …

過(guò)程與方法：Analytic approach，Aural-oral method 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生積極主動(dòng)的學(xué)習(xí)態(tài)度，能大膽開(kāi)口，積極參與各項(xiàng)學(xué)習(xí)活動(dòng)，善于與同學(xué)交流。培養(yǎng)學(xué)生團(tuán)結(jié)合作的精神，養(yǎng)成良好的文明習(xí)慣。

【重點(diǎn)】： 詞組：watching TV talking to … taking pictures reading a book writing a letter playing with listening to music 【難點(diǎn)】：句型：

1)---What are you doing?---I ' m …

2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is … 【教學(xué)方法】：講授 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入： 1． Warm—up a.Greeting b.Ask and answer檢查上節(jié)課學(xué)過(guò)的對(duì)話(huà)。c.讓學(xué)生根據(jù)以前學(xué)過(guò)的內(nèi)容做動(dòng)作。如：play table tennis ,swimming, cycling 2.Leading-up 準(zhǔn)備階段以后，教師問(wèn):Do you know other actions? 出示Lingling 正在寫(xiě)信的圖片，學(xué)習(xí)單詞write，letter然后根據(jù)詞組作出動(dòng)作?；蛘呓處熥鰟?dòng)作學(xué)生說(shuō)句子。

同學(xué)之間練習(xí)。同樣學(xué)習(xí)其他的單詞、詞組。

（二）探究新知：

單詞的學(xué)習(xí)過(guò)程中，教師或者磁帶領(lǐng)讀，糾正發(fā)音。小組練習(xí)。同桌練習(xí)等。

在練習(xí)正確發(fā)音之后，句型的練習(xí)，教師根據(jù)學(xué)生的掌握情況采取I do you say ,I say you do ,I do you draw等形式，鞏固所學(xué)的詞組。

課文學(xué)習(xí)

出示課本,大家看一下Sam給大家?guī)?lái)了許多圖片,我們來(lái)一起學(xué)一下他是怎么來(lái)向大家介紹的.（1）Listen and point.播放錄音，主要培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的認(rèn)讀能力，至少聽(tīng)兩遍。（2）Listen and repeat.再次撥放錄音，學(xué)生邊指邊讀。（3）Listen and answer What is lingling doing ? What is Daming doing ? What is Amy doing ? What is Tom doing ? 找同學(xué)回答。

(4)再次放錄音,學(xué)生跟讀.(5)看課本圖片,從第一幅圖片開(kāi)始,找同學(xué)幫Sam介紹.直到最后一幅.(6)分組或男女生分別介紹一幅.同桌或小組練習(xí).（三）鞏固新知：

watching TV talking to … taking pictures reading a book writing a letter playing with listening to music 1)---What are you doing?---I ' m …

2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is …

3)---What are they doing?---They are …

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：歸納總結(jié)本課內(nèi)容,強(qiáng)調(diào)如何描述某人正在做某事.鞏固所學(xué)的動(dòng)詞詞組.（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Module3 watching TV talking to … taking pictures reading a book writing a letter playing with listening to music 1)---What are you doing?---I ' m …

2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is …

3)---What are they doing?---They are …

Module 2 Unit 2 What are you doing?

第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

1)---What are you doing?---I ' m …

2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is …

過(guò)程與方法：Aural-oral method，Analytic approach 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：表述正在進(jìn)行的事物

【重點(diǎn)】：學(xué)習(xí)如何表述及問(wèn)答正在發(fā)生的動(dòng)作?！倦y點(diǎn)】：進(jìn)行時(shí)態(tài)的學(xué)習(xí)，詞組 【教學(xué)方法】：講授、游戲 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入： 1． Warm—up a.Greeting b.Ask and Answer復(fù)習(xí)上節(jié)課學(xué)過(guò)的內(nèi)容，出示掛圖根據(jù)掛圖的內(nèi)容,說(shuō)出句子,可找個(gè)人說(shuō),或小組代表,或集體說(shuō).2.Leading-up a.找同學(xué)做動(dòng)作,其他同學(xué)介紹他在做什么? b.同學(xué)做動(dòng)作.老師問(wèn)What are you doing?多說(shuō)幾遍,找同學(xué)回答,然后讓學(xué)生試著說(shuō) What are you doing?可以師生問(wèn)答,或生生問(wèn)答.掌握好之后變換人稱(chēng)What is he /she doing ?三人一小組進(jìn)行練習(xí).學(xué)習(xí)新單詞 listen to ,music, read ,掌握詞組listen to music, read a book,根據(jù)卡片練習(xí)句子I’m listening to music /reading a book./ watchingTV，（二）探究新知：

大家看一下Sam的一家在忙什么,（1）Listen and point.播放錄音，主要培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的認(rèn)讀能力，至少聽(tīng)兩遍。（2）Listen and repeat.再次撥放錄音，學(xué)生邊指邊讀。(3)小組對(duì)話(huà)練習(xí).分角色朗讀.練習(xí)2,point and say 對(duì)話(huà)練習(xí): What is sam doing? He ’s listening to music 同桌問(wèn)答.找同學(xué)起來(lái)說(shuō).練習(xí)3.Act it out.What is he /she doing ?的問(wèn)答.找同學(xué)到講臺(tái)上每一個(gè)人做一個(gè)動(dòng)作不動(dòng).其他同學(xué)進(jìn)行問(wèn)答.練習(xí)5 仍舊是對(duì)正在進(jìn)行的動(dòng)作進(jìn)行描述.鞏固練習(xí).也可以采取you say I do ,you do I say ,you say I draw等形式.（三）鞏固新知：

學(xué)習(xí)順口溜：“我”用“ am ”，“你”用“ are ”，“ is ”跟著“他、她、它” , 兩個(gè)以上都用“ are ”。

1)---What are you doing?

---I ' m …

2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is …

3)---What are they doing?---They are …

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：歸納總結(jié)本節(jié)課的所學(xué)的內(nèi)容.What are you doing? I’m listening to music What is he /she doing ?

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Unit 2 What are you doing? What are you doing? I’m listening to music What is he /she doing ?

（七）課后反思：

Module 3 Unit 1 What are they doing?

第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

1）學(xué)習(xí)詢(xún)問(wèn)他人正在做什么事情。2）描述他人正在做的事情。

3）學(xué)生能夠聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、認(rèn)boat chess row soybean milk drink hungry

過(guò)程與方法：以趣味性為主導(dǎo)，將情景教學(xué)法、直觀教學(xué)法、游戲法、聽(tīng)說(shuō)演唱法有機(jī)的溶為一體，為學(xué)生創(chuàng)設(shè)一種輕松、活潑、和諧、有趣的學(xué)習(xí)氛圍。

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：通過(guò)創(chuàng)設(shè)和諧的氛圍，讓孩子們輕松愉快地學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)，并形成良好的英語(yǔ)語(yǔ)感。

【重點(diǎn)】：

1）學(xué)說(shuō)問(wèn)句What are they doing? 2）掌握句型They’re 動(dòng)詞+ing [+賓語(yǔ)] 【難點(diǎn)】：能清晰準(zhǔn)確地發(fā)出本課所教的單詞的音，并自如地應(yīng)用。【教學(xué)方法】：講授, 小組討論 直觀教學(xué)法、游戲法、聽(tīng)說(shuō)演唱法有機(jī)的溶為一體

【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

一、Warming up 師生齊唱M2 中的小詩(shī)，并配以動(dòng)作。

二、Revision

1.教師快速向?qū)W生出示幾組詞，每組包含一個(gè)動(dòng)詞，請(qǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)出這個(gè)動(dòng)詞。師板書(shū)：read , write ,listen，play , talk …

2.請(qǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)這些動(dòng)詞的-ing形式。

3． 齊讀黑板上的動(dòng)詞及其-ing形式。

（二）探究新知：

（一）學(xué)習(xí)新句型

1.請(qǐng)一學(xué)生挑選黑板上所提供的任一動(dòng)詞，做出相應(yīng)的動(dòng)作。

2.教師通過(guò)提問(wèn)：What is he/ she doing ?復(fù)習(xí)He’s/ She’s 動(dòng)詞+ing 賓語(yǔ)]。

3.請(qǐng)?jiān)撋诮M的成員模仿該生的動(dòng)作，并做動(dòng)作邊說(shuō)：I’m動(dòng)詞+ing [+賓語(yǔ)]。

4.教師故作不解狀問(wèn)：What are they doing ? 后又釋然說(shuō)：Oh.They’re 動(dòng)詞+ing [+賓語(yǔ)],并板書(shū)。

5.教師指著黑板上的句子，請(qǐng)學(xué)生跟說(shuō)多遍。

6.再請(qǐng)一組學(xué)生挑選黑板上所提供的任一動(dòng)詞（不能重復(fù)），做出

相應(yīng)的動(dòng)作，教師請(qǐng)其他學(xué)生回答問(wèn)題：What are they doing ? 然后教師把正確答案寫(xiě)在黑板上。

7.請(qǐng)學(xué)生一起認(rèn)讀黑板上的句子。(二）學(xué)習(xí)新動(dòng)詞

1.告訴學(xué)生，教師將要模仿一個(gè)動(dòng)作，他們要猜猜教師正在做什么。2.教師模仿動(dòng)作后提問(wèn)：What am I doing?(我正做什么？)引入句子： I’m doing taijiquan.。

3.請(qǐng)全體學(xué)生一起邊做動(dòng)作，邊說(shuō)：I’m doing taijiquan.教師通過(guò)提 問(wèn)：What are they doing ?引入句子：They’re doing taijiquan.并板書(shū)。

4.用類(lèi)似方法教They’re row a dragon boat.并板書(shū)。

5.教師拿出一副國(guó)際象棋問(wèn)學(xué)生What’s this ? Do you want to play ? 并告訴他們老師將邀請(qǐng)他們一起玩，但玩之前必須先學(xué)會(huì)說(shuō) play chess, 并板書(shū)。

6.教說(shuō)chess, play chess。

7.教師做饑餓狀說(shuō)：I’m hungry.I’m hungry.板書(shū)hungry（餓的）并 重復(fù)說(shuō)多遍，再提問(wèn)學(xué)生：What’s the matter with me?由此教單詞hungry（餓的）。

8.教師從包中拿出一瓶豆奶說(shuō)：I want to drink soybean milk.邊“喝 邊說(shuō)：drink drink , I’m drinking.讓學(xué)生模仿跟著教師重復(fù)句子并模仿動(dòng)作。

9.教師拿著豆奶走到學(xué)生中，到邊“喝”邊說(shuō)：Soybean milk is very nice.Soybean milk is very nice.提問(wèn)學(xué)生What am I drink? 由此教說(shuō)soybean milk（豆奶）并板書(shū)。

10.請(qǐng)一些學(xué)生模仿喝豆奶的動(dòng)作，比比誰(shuí)表演的最好。其間老師可以適時(shí)用What is he/ she doing ? What are they doing ?提問(wèn)其余學(xué)生。

（三）鞏固新知：

（一）快速反應(yīng)

1.請(qǐng)幾位學(xué)生到教室前，由教師說(shuō)動(dòng)詞詞組，學(xué)生模仿動(dòng)作，比比誰(shuí)的反應(yīng)最靈敏。

2.讓學(xué)生在小組內(nèi)進(jìn)行訓(xùn)練。

（二）表演

1.請(qǐng)學(xué)生打開(kāi)課本P15，教師指著人們劃船的圖問(wèn)

學(xué)生：What are they doing ? 學(xué)生應(yīng)回答：They are rowing a boat.2.四人小組中，請(qǐng)學(xué)生A 和B向?qū)W生C和D模仿一個(gè)動(dòng)作，然后由C和D提問(wèn)：A 和B在做什么？

3.讓小組內(nèi)學(xué)生互換角色。

4.請(qǐng)幾位學(xué)生到教室前模仿動(dòng)作，教師提問(wèn)：What are they doing ?然后讓全班或個(gè)別學(xué)生回答。

（三）游戲

1.教師在黑板上貼上正面寫(xiě)有數(shù)字，反面寫(xiě)有：

do taijiquan, row a boat, play chess等動(dòng)詞詞組的卡片。2.請(qǐng)自愿上臺(tái)的學(xué)生背朝大家，選擇其中的一個(gè)數(shù)字，教師翻開(kāi)此卡片的反面示以臺(tái)下的同學(xué)，臺(tái)下學(xué)生根據(jù)卡片上的內(nèi)容做出相應(yīng)的動(dòng)作。

3.臺(tái)上的同學(xué)必須用英語(yǔ)They’re 動(dòng)詞+ing [+賓語(yǔ)]來(lái)猜測(cè)臺(tái)下同學(xué)所做的動(dòng)作。如果說(shuō)對(duì)了，臺(tái)下同學(xué)要說(shuō)“Yes”，若連猜3次不中，可用What are they doing?請(qǐng)求他的朋友，幫忙回答。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本單元學(xué)會(huì)了現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)的用法，尤其是be動(dòng)詞和動(dòng)詞加ing的用法

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Unit 1 What are they doing ? doing taijiquan rowing a dragon boat playing chess Drinking soybean milk playing football/basketball/table tennis/ Swimming running jumping

Module 3 Unit 2 What is the elephant doing ?

第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

1)學(xué)生能夠聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、認(rèn)park lake thing interesting people men get on lots of let’s 2)能聽(tīng)懂、會(huì)說(shuō)本課對(duì)話(huà)。

過(guò)程與方法：以趣味性為主導(dǎo)，將情景教學(xué)法、直觀教學(xué)法、游戲法、聽(tīng)說(shuō)演唱法有機(jī)的溶為一體，為學(xué)生創(chuàng)設(shè)一種輕松、活潑、和諧、有趣的學(xué)習(xí)氛圍。

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：能夠運(yùn)用所學(xué)英語(yǔ)句子，進(jìn)行簡(jiǎn)單的擴(kuò)展性交流。【重點(diǎn)】：1）繼續(xù)掌握句型They’re 動(dòng)詞+ing [+賓語(yǔ)]

2）描述地點(diǎn)位置

【難點(diǎn)】：通過(guò)描述人物行為，簡(jiǎn)要說(shuō)明一處場(chǎng)景?！窘虒W(xué)方法】：講授、游戲 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

一、Warming up 師生互相打招呼，問(wèn)好。

二、Revision 1．教師說(shuō)動(dòng)名詞：swimming, singing, dancing, rowing…請(qǐng)學(xué)生作 出相應(yīng)動(dòng)作。

2．Free talk.以小組為單位選派一名代表，用英語(yǔ)描述本組成員收 集的有關(guān)人物或動(dòng)物正在進(jìn)行的某種動(dòng)作的照片、圖片等。

（二）探究新知：

（一）單詞教學(xué)

1教師留下學(xué)生收集的資料，并指著它們說(shuō)：Look, there are lots of pictures.用聲調(diào)變化突出強(qiáng)調(diào)lots of，并板書(shū)lots of（許多）。

2教師可利用身邊的物體，用lots of造句，使學(xué)生明白詞組的意思。3教說(shuō)lots of 4請(qǐng)學(xué)生造句（告訴他們可以用“三明治”英語(yǔ)）。

5教師隨意拿起教室里的任一物品說(shuō)，“This thing is good.This thing is nice…”請(qǐng)學(xué)生猜猜“thing”的意思。6教師板書(shū)thing（東西，物品）并教說(shuō)單詞。

7教師拿出一件有趣的物品說(shuō)：Look at this thing.Is it interesting ? 由此引入“interesting”，板書(shū)并教說(shuō)interesting（有趣的）。8． 請(qǐng)學(xué)生用“三明治”英語(yǔ)說(shuō)說(shuō)生活中哪些事是interesting。

（二）課文教學(xué) 1．告訴學(xué)生，老師將要帶領(lǐng)大家去看看Daming and Sam 今天get on the bus（乘上公共汽車(chē)）后將會(huì)看到哪些interesting things。Let’s go.2．學(xué)生觀看電腦光盤(pán)或聽(tīng)錄音磁帶。

3．教師用漢語(yǔ)詢(xún)問(wèn)學(xué)生幾個(gè)簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)題，看看學(xué)生是否明白故事 的意思。例如：

Daming and Sam 在哪里？他們看見(jiàn)了什么？ 4．再次播發(fā)媒體。

5．教師通過(guò)提問(wèn)：Where are the people doing taijiquan? 引出詞組 in the park板書(shū)并教說(shuō)。提問(wèn)Where are the people rowing a dragon boat? 引出詞組 on the lake板書(shū)并教說(shuō)。提問(wèn)Where are the men playing chess? 引出詞組 under the tree 板書(shū)并教說(shuō)。

6．學(xué)生打開(kāi)課本，跟說(shuō)句子。

（三）鞏固新知：

1．分別由教師和全體學(xué)生朗讀Daming和Sam對(duì)話(huà)內(nèi)容。2．把全班分為兩個(gè)大組，朗讀對(duì)話(huà)。3．請(qǐng)學(xué)生兩人一組，練習(xí)朗讀。

4．請(qǐng)幾對(duì)學(xué)生表演課文內(nèi)容，或看著動(dòng)畫(huà)配音。

doing taijiquan rowing a dragon boat playing chess Drinking soybean milk playing football/basketball/table tennis/ Swimming running jumping 2、句型：

1)---What are you doing?---I ' m …

2)---What is heshe doing?---HeShe is …

3)---What are they doing?---They are …

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本單元學(xué)習(xí)了第三人稱(chēng)的進(jìn)行時(shí)，用is 加動(dòng)詞的ing

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Unit 1 What are they doing ? doing taijiquan rowing a dragon boat playing chess Drinking soybean milk playing football/basketball/table tennis/ Swimming running jumping

（七）課后反思：

Module 4 Unit 1 Do you want some rice?

第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：1）能聽(tīng)說(shuō)讀寫(xiě)單詞：Chinese、fast food、chopsticks、difficult、want、make,some 2)能使用句子：Do you want some...?且能做出正確回答Yes,please.No,thank you.3)掌握并能運(yùn)用句型：Do you want some...? 過(guò)程與方法：Listening and speaking;task-based teaching method.情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：學(xué)生能夠看圖正確描述不同人稱(chēng)所正在發(fā)生 的行為和動(dòng)作，并能夠正確運(yùn)用。

【重點(diǎn)】：chopsticks、difficult的發(fā)音及新句型的運(yùn)用?！倦y點(diǎn)】：學(xué)生在運(yùn)用現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)的時(shí)候，能根據(jù)不同的人稱(chēng)正確選用“be” 【教學(xué)方法】：講授 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

step1、Warming up 1、Greetings

2、Play a game: gussing game T:Hello,boys and girls.Ss:...T:Today we will learn the new lesson Module5 Food.First, let's play a guessing game.(復(fù)習(xí)以前學(xué)過(guò)的食物的單詞)引導(dǎo)學(xué)生要用句型：Have you got _____? Yes ,I have.No, I haven’t.（二）探究新知：

1、Do you like the food? I like noodles and rice.I like Chinese food.教學(xué)Chinese(小組讀，個(gè)人讀)

2、T:duplings、noodles and rice are Chinese fast food.Do you like Chinese fast food? Ss:...（教學(xué)fast food）小火車(chē)讀 Do you want some rice?(引出課題)用duplings、noodles 替換rice練讀句型Do you want some...?并讓學(xué)生用此句型向老師提問(wèn)。老師回答Yes,please.No,thank you.3、T:I like noodles.But I don't know making noodles.Do you know making noodles? Ss:...T:（出示圖片）Look, he's making noodles.(隨機(jī)教學(xué) making noodles)

4、T:I'm hungry.I want to eat some noodles.I need chopsticks.(用體態(tài)語(yǔ)幫助學(xué)生理解句意，同時(shí)拿出筷子)教學(xué) chopsticks(把單詞為兩個(gè)部分chops ticks)告訴學(xué)生這個(gè)詞語(yǔ)永遠(yuǎn)要用復(fù)數(shù)

5、T:Chopsticks are easy for me.But chopsticks are difficult for Amy.(出示圖片)教學(xué) difficult（個(gè)人讀-小組讀，齊讀）

6、教授句型Do you want some...?Yes,please.No,thank you.T:Mm,the food is very nice.Do you want some...? 1）板書(shū)Do you want some...? 2）引導(dǎo)學(xué)生回答Yes,please.No,thank you并板書(shū)

（三）鞏固新知：

1、practice 1）老師輪流指著實(shí)物圖片提問(wèn)Do you want some...? 2）全班開(kāi)火車(chē)操練

2、聽(tīng)課文錄音 全班跟讀3遍 分角色跟讀

extension 創(chuàng)設(shè)去飯館的情境表演對(duì)話(huà)（一名服務(wù)員、兩名顧客）讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行對(duì)話(huà)： A: Excuse me , can I help you? B: I want to east fast food.A: Do you want some _____? B: Yes, please.No, thank you.A: Anything else? B: That’s all, thank you A: You’re welcome.（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：1.T: Today, we learn how to use “Do you want some…?

Yes, please./ No, thank you.” to order food.2.Try to balance your diet by eating more fruit and less protein.（多吃些水果，少攝入些蛋白質(zhì)，使飲食均衡合理。）An apple a day keeps doctor away.（一日一蘋(píng)果，醫(yī)生遠(yuǎn)離我。引導(dǎo)孩子健康飲食）

3.英國(guó)人的就餐禮儀（了解并對(duì)比中西方飲食文化的差異）

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Module5 unit1 Do you want some rice? Do you want some_____? Yes, please.No, thank you.Module 4 Unit 2 How much is it?第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：What are you doing ? I’m making dumplings/ I’m cooking vegetable.Do you want some ? Yes , please./ No , thank you.過(guò)程與方法：Task-based teaching method;situation teaching method 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：Help students to know order food;cultivate the attitude to love English and speak out bravely.【重點(diǎn)】：1.A: What are you doing? B:I’m making/ cooking????______.2.A:Do you want some? B:Yes, please./No, thank you.【難點(diǎn)】：The usage of“make”and “cook”.【教學(xué)方法】：講授、游戲 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入： 一．Warming up Greeting

Good morning.How are you ? Can you …?

二．Chant : left foot ,right foot ,left foot right 三．Review 展示卡片

T：What’s this ? Ss : cake, rice , noodles , fish(學(xué)生快速讀出)T: Do you want some …

Ss: Yes ,please./ No , thank you.四．實(shí)物導(dǎo)入

1.T：老師今天帶了二種好吃又有營(yíng)養(yǎng)的東西，大家猜猜是什么？（學(xué)生猜）師拿出餃子教學(xué)dumpling ①全班讀 ②個(gè)別讀 ③小組讀

2．同法教學(xué)vegetable ①唱反調(diào)（師大聲讀單詞，生小聲；反之師小聲生大聲）②全班讀單詞 五．鞏固單詞

Play a game猜單詞

（二）探究新知：

師把剛剛復(fù)習(xí)的單詞和新授單詞的卡片藏起來(lái)，給學(xué)生三次機(jī)會(huì)猜猜藏的是哪兩張，如果學(xué)生兩張都猜錯(cuò)了，師說(shuō)“no”。如果猜對(duì)一張師說(shuō)“YES”但是不給學(xué)生看卡片，兩張都猜對(duì)了給學(xué)生看卡片讀出單詞，并給予獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。

六．情境中學(xué)句型

1． I’m making dumplings.T：今天老師非常高興，所以要大展廚藝（帶上圍裙，包餃子），now ,look here ,What am I doing? 想不想知道老師在干什么嗎？要用英語(yǔ)怎么問(wèn)呢？ Ss：What are you doing ?(板書(shū))T：I’m making dumplings.Do you want some?(板書(shū))采用不同形式讀句型I’m making dumplings.(如：師讀快，生讀慢；師讀慢，生讀快)2． I’m cooking dumplings.T:接下來(lái)，老師要展示每二樣廚藝，Look here(師抄菜)，想知道Miss Lin 正做什么要用英語(yǔ)怎么問(wèn)

Ss: What are you doing?(板書(shū))T： I’m cooking vegetables.Do you want some.(板書(shū))采用不同形式讀句型I’m cooking dumplings.（如：

（三）鞏固新知：(1)學(xué)生對(duì)話(huà)第一部分

1．T：Now open your book ,turn to page20.今天Sam 和Amy去Darming家做客，我們來(lái)看看Daming 一家做了什么好吃的請(qǐng)他們。（播放CD—ROM）

T：他們來(lái)到Daming 家，看到Daming正在making dumplings,他們兩個(gè)不知道Daming在干嘛，他們是怎么問(wèn)？

S1：What are you doing ,Daming? T: Daming 是怎么回答？

S1： I’m making dumplings? 全班跟著CD—ROM讀。2． 情境表演

師去學(xué)生家做客，學(xué)生正在包餃子 T： What are you doing ? Ss: I’m making dumplings.Do you want some ? T: Yes ,please.（2）學(xué)生第二部分

1．T：Daming家除了Making dumplings 還做了什么好吃的？ Ss: Cooking vegetables.T: Daming 急匆匆來(lái)到廚房里，看到媽媽正在cooking dumplings 他是怎么問(wèn)的？

SS: What are you doing? T: mother是怎么回答的？

Ss: I’m cooking vegetables.Read after the CD-ROM 2.鞏固練習(xí)

①師做抄菜動(dòng)作

Ss: What are you doing ? T: I’m cooking vegetables.Do you want some ? Ss: Yes ,please./ No, thank you.②Play a game 聽(tīng)音樂(lè)傳勺子,音樂(lè)一停，拿到勺子的學(xué)生做抄菜的動(dòng)作，其他學(xué)生問(wèn) What are you doing ?此生回答I’m cooking Vegetables.Do you want some ?操練對(duì)話(huà)。

3． 表演課文對(duì)話(huà)

小組合作，表演課文對(duì)話(huà)。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：學(xué)習(xí)食物的情景的同時(shí)繼續(xù)鞏固動(dòng)詞進(jìn)行時(shí)

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

What are you doing ? I’m making dumplings/ I’m cooking vegetable.Do you want some ? Yes , please./ No , thank you.（七）課后反思：

Module 5 Unit 1 Can you run fast?

第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

1、能聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、認(rèn)讀單詞：can, run, fast, jump ,high, far, ride

2、能聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、認(rèn)讀并運(yùn)用句型： 1)I can run fast/jump high /…

2)------Can you run fast /jump high/jump far/ ride fast …?------Yes , I can./No, I can’t.過(guò)程與方法：

1、Teach the text with the task based method.2、Do a survey by cooperative learning.3、sing songs 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：讓學(xué)生通過(guò)能力的談?wù)?，了解自己的?yōu)點(diǎn)。引導(dǎo)學(xué)生在學(xué)習(xí)中體驗(yàn)成功、感受快樂(lè)，樹(shù)立學(xué)習(xí)的自信心。

【重點(diǎn)】：can, run, fast, jump ,high, far, ride 【難點(diǎn)】：1)I can run fast/jump high /…

2)------Can you run fast /jump high/jump far/ ride fast …?------Yes , I can./No, I can’t.【教學(xué)方法】：講授 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Step1 Warmer

1、Sing the song “ Row the boat ”

2、chant : Make a cake

3、Do and say Tell the students: Let’s have a match in groups.I’ll do some actions.Please look and say them quickly : play football/swim /play basketball /…

Then do and teach the new words: run ,jump ,high ,far ,ride Have the students practice in pairs.（二）探究新知：

1、Let the groups do the actions that the teacher says.Teach “can ”by this way : Oh ,look!Group A can do it well.Explain the meaning of “can ”

2、Do the actions and say : I can swim/run fast/ jump high /… Do some examples and let the students practice in pairs.Then ask some pairs to act it out.3、After acting ,do and say like this :I can jump high.Can you jump high ? Help the students answer : Yes , I can./ No, I can’t.（三）鞏固新知：Listen ,find and say

1、Show the picture and tell the students :Our friends : Amy Sam and Daming are having a match.Now look at the picture and listen : Who is the winner ?

2、Play the tape for the students to listen and find the answer.3、Have the students look at their book ,listen and repeat.4、Then let them practice reading in pairs or groups.Consolidation Do Activity book Exercise 1 and 2

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本單元學(xué)習(xí)了能力方面的句子，涉及了很多實(shí)意動(dòng)詞的圓形

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Module 6 Abilities Unit 1 Can you run fast ?

Module 5 Unit 2 Can Sam play football?

第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

1、能聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、認(rèn)讀單詞：flute, wash, clothes, draw

2、能聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、認(rèn)讀并運(yùn)用句型：

1)------Can you play the flute /wash clothes/…?------Yes, I can./No, I can’t.2)I can write a letter/…

I can’t row a boat /… 過(guò)程與方法：講授、游戲

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：讓學(xué)生通過(guò)能力的談?wù)摚私庾约旱拈L(zhǎng)處及不足。引導(dǎo)學(xué)生在學(xué)習(xí)中體驗(yàn)成功、感受快樂(lè)并能取長(zhǎng)補(bǔ)短。

【重點(diǎn)】：flute, wash, clothes, draw 【難點(diǎn)】：

1)------Can you play the flute /wash clothes/…?------Yes, I can./No, I can’t.2)I can write a letter/…

I can’t row a boat /… 【教學(xué)方法】：講授、游戲 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Step 1 Warmer

1、chant : Make a cake

2、Revise the phrases by doing actions: play football/run fast /jump high / jump far /ride fast /…

3、Do and teach the new words : play flute/ draw/wash clothes Then let the students practice in pairs.（二）探究新知：

1、The teacher does the action and say the sentence : I can play the flute.Can you play the flute ,_____? Asks one student to answer.Make more with some individual students.2、Have the students to ask and answer in pairs using the new phrases.3、Ask some pairs to act out.Step 3 Listen point and say SB P24 Part 1

1、let the students look at their books and listen to the tape to draw the right picture.2、Check the answer with the whole class.3、Play the tape again for them to listen and repeat.4、Have the students to read in pairs.Step 4 Listen point and say SB P25 Part 4

1、Have the students to look at the pictures first.Then play the record for them to listen and choose.2、Check the answer together.3、Let the students look at the picture and say about themselves like this : I can …/I can’t…

Step 5 Listen and say ,then sing and do the actions.SB P25 Part 3

1、Read the words with the students together.It’s easy for the students to read.2、Play the tape for the students to listen to the song first.Then have them to sing after the tape.3、Let the students sing and do the actions together.(We can have a match.)Step 6 Consolidation Do Activity book Exercise 4 and 5

（三）鞏固新知：

利用 chant 復(fù)習(xí)舊知，活躍氣氛。以 Chant ： Run, run, I can run.開(kāi)始本課的學(xué)習(xí)，既活躍氣氛，又為接下來(lái)的學(xué)習(xí)做好了充分的準(zhǔn)備。

以新習(xí)舊，注重語(yǔ)音語(yǔ)調(diào)。在鞏固句型的過(guò)程中，可加入以前學(xué)過(guò)的動(dòng)作詞語(yǔ)進(jìn)行操練，注意升調(diào)的運(yùn)用，后面副詞可以重讀，起到強(qiáng)調(diào)的作用，整個(gè)句子說(shuō)起來(lái)抑揚(yáng)頓挫，學(xué)生也都非常喜歡

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本模塊主要學(xué)習(xí)了can問(wèn)句的肯定回答和否定回答

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

1)------Can you play the flute /wash clothes/…?------Yes, I can./No, I can’t.2)I can write a letter/… I can’t row a boat /…

（七）課后反思：

Module 6 Unit 1 Can I have some sweets ?

第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

1.學(xué)習(xí)語(yǔ)句:Can I have…? 口頭運(yùn)用Can I have…? 這類(lèi)語(yǔ)句詢(xún)問(wèn)他人需要什么或者自己需要什么。

2.學(xué)習(xí)M9單詞

3.復(fù)習(xí)一首歌謠Happy birthday to you!過(guò)程與方法：運(yùn)用探究合作的學(xué)習(xí)方法，激發(fā)學(xué)生興趣 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生樂(lè)于助人的習(xí)慣 【重點(diǎn)】：學(xué)習(xí)語(yǔ)句: Can I have…? M9單詞

【難點(diǎn)】：口頭運(yùn)用 Can I have…? 短語(yǔ)Turn on 【教學(xué)方法】：講授, 積極主動(dòng)接受學(xué)習(xí),對(duì)話(huà)法，游戲法 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入： Warmer: T: Hello.Ss: Hello teacher.T: What are you going to do on Saturday ? Ss: I’m going to ….T: I’m going to join sports meeting.look here.(展示關(guān)于運(yùn)動(dòng)的幻燈片)。What’s this ? Ss: It’s football.T: Can you play football ? S: Yes ,I can / No, I can’t.（二）探究新知： Presentation: Let The students look at the screen.(a picture of sports)And ask the students “Can you play…?” Students answer the questions.最后一張幻燈片用糖果

T: What are they ? Ss: They are sweets.T: Yes, Now ,I’m hungry.Can I have some Sweets?(Write this title on the board)Teach new lesson: 1.T:Today is Amy’s birthday.Her mother make some food for her.But she don’t know ,we are going to give her a surprise.At first Let’s look at these food.(展示關(guān)于食物的幻燈片，學(xué)習(xí)soup, sweets, bread, biscuit, fruit)Let Ss learn them and ask them: Can I have …? 2.listen to the tape.3.Play the tape the students should read after it.Let The students listen to the tape and repeat.Then let The students chant with the music.（三）鞏固新知：Game 將全班分成幾組，教師出示有關(guān)食物的卡片，要求學(xué)生看到食物后立刻造句，哪組有一名學(xué)生先站起來(lái)，就算哪組先搶達(dá)到。搶到的小組每人要迅速造一個(gè)句子，只要有一個(gè)成員沒(méi)有完成造句，就不得分，最后哪組搶達(dá)最多，造句最多，教師發(fā)給每個(gè)成員一枚粘貼作為獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：can I 表示禮貌的請(qǐng)求，后面直接跟句子

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Can I have some sweets? Words soup sorry sweet bread

Module 6 Unit 2 Happy Halloween！

第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：能熟練運(yùn)用“Can I have…?/ Can you …?” 能夠掌握模塊單詞。

了解關(guān)于萬(wàn)圣節(jié)的知識(shí)

過(guò)程與方法：運(yùn)用探究合作的學(xué)習(xí)方法，激發(fā)學(xué)生興趣 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：了解西方節(jié)日和文化

【重點(diǎn)】：學(xué)習(xí)語(yǔ)句: “Can I have…?/ Can you …?”和本模塊單詞 【難點(diǎn)】：聽(tīng)懂目標(biāo)語(yǔ)句并會(huì)用“Can I have…?/ Can you …?” 【教學(xué)方法】：講授、游戲，Ppt,直觀教學(xué)法，表演法，對(duì)話(huà)法 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

Warmmer.1.Greetings.2.Let’s have a match.GroupA and GroupB ,which group can say lots of food and make sentenses about “Can I have…?”.The students say,the teacher Draws Stars.Which group can say more words ,they are the winner.（二）探究新知：Presentation In China , there are some special days, e.g: Spring Festival, Dragon Boat Festival and so on.But in oversea ,there are some special days,e.g: Christmas Day and Helloween.Write this title on the board.Teach new lesson: 展示幻燈片，并且了解萬(wàn)圣節(jié)，萬(wàn)圣節(jié)是西方的傳統(tǒng)節(jié)日。萬(wàn)圣節(jié)前夜，即10月31日夜晚，是兒童們縱情玩樂(lè)的好時(shí)候。它在孩子們眼中，是一個(gè)充滿(mǎn)神秘色彩的節(jié)日。夜幕降臨，孩子們便迫不及待地穿上五顏六色的化妝服，戴上千奇百怪的面具，提上一盞南瓜燈跑出去玩。挨家挨戶(hù)收集糖果。并且讓學(xué)生復(fù)習(xí)并運(yùn)用“Can I have some sweets ?”簡(jiǎn)單了解服飾和南瓜燈。

（三）鞏固新知： Practise 創(chuàng)設(shè)情景并練習(xí)運(yùn)用“Can I have some sweets ?”

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：通過(guò)中外的節(jié)日，進(jìn)一步練習(xí)Can I 句型

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Happy Halloween!Can I have some sweets ? Here you are.（七）課后反思：

Module 7 Unit 1 There is a house in this photo.第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生運(yùn)用There is 或是There are 來(lái)談?wù)撆c月份有關(guān)的情況。

過(guò)程與方法：講授法、情景導(dǎo)入法、師生互動(dòng)、游戲法

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：Improve the students’ appreciation.【重點(diǎn)】： 學(xué)習(xí)句型There is /are… birthdays in … 掌握單詞及詞組： January/ February/March/ April/ May/ June

【難點(diǎn)】：能夠掌握運(yùn)用一至六月份英語(yǔ)名稱(chēng)。

【教學(xué)方法】：講授，講授法、情景導(dǎo)入法、游戲法、師生互動(dòng)、生生互動(dòng) 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Revision: 1.Do duty report.2.學(xué)生報(bào)數(shù)

（二）探究新知：Presentation: 1.讓學(xué)生猜教師的生日在幾月份，引出 “My birthday is in January.” 2.出示一月份日歷，教說(shuō)January及句型“My birthday is in January”.3.請(qǐng)一月份過(guò)生日的同學(xué)說(shuō)句型。

(通過(guò)教師的生日引出本課的知識(shí)點(diǎn)，使學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)的興趣高漲。因?yàn)閷W(xué)生對(duì)教師的情況是非常關(guān)注的。日歷的出現(xiàn)，使學(xué)生對(duì)句子的理解毫無(wú)障礙。)4.當(dāng)一月份過(guò)生日的學(xué)生說(shuō)完句型后，教師提問(wèn)：”How many birthdays are there in January?” 幫助學(xué)生數(shù)一數(shù)，得到答案?！?There are four birthdays in January.板書(shū)句型，學(xué)生學(xué)說(shuō)。

5.學(xué)說(shuō)單詞February, 提出問(wèn)題：”How many days are there in February?”

There are 28 or 29 days in February.6.由問(wèn)題 How many days are there in March? 引出單詞March 的教學(xué)。學(xué)生談?wù)揥hat can the children do in March?（通過(guò)學(xué)生談?wù)揥hat can the children do in March? 可以為學(xué)生創(chuàng)設(shè)運(yùn)用英語(yǔ)的真實(shí)語(yǔ)境，使學(xué)生有機(jī)的將新舊知識(shí)緊密結(jié)合。）

7.教授單詞April，并請(qǐng)同學(xué)猜一猜How many birthdays are there in April? 請(qǐng)四月份過(guò)日的同學(xué)起立，揭示答案。

8.通過(guò)猜謎語(yǔ)的形式引出單詞May 的教學(xué)?！癟here are 31 days.It’s warm.There is a seven-day holiday in it.And the Labor’s Day, too

（三）鞏固新知：Practice: 1.教師說(shuō)月份單詞，學(xué)生用手指表示相應(yīng)月份。引出新單詞June, 學(xué)說(shuō)。(回顧1至5月份剛剛學(xué)過(guò)的單詞，既是一個(gè)小的復(fù)習(xí)，又起到了承上啟下的銜接作用，可謂一舉兩得。)2.學(xué)生同桌間談?wù)撍麄冏钕矚g的月份，并說(shuō)出原因。3.游戲活動(dòng)：聽(tīng)音做一做。

Whose birthday is in January? Please point to the door.Whose birthday is in May? Please clap five.Whose birthday is in April? Please jump two times.……

Whose birthday is in June? Please point to the Lingling.（通過(guò)這個(gè)游戲活動(dòng)中，可以檢查學(xué)生對(duì)新知的接受、理解情況，還可以有效的鞏固重點(diǎn)內(nèi)容，化解教學(xué)難點(diǎn)。并引出課文教學(xué)。）

4.Lingling 在哪里？請(qǐng)學(xué)生看書(shū)，聽(tīng)課文錄音。

5.跟錄音磁帶朗讀課文。

6.講解語(yǔ)境語(yǔ) count/ parties 7.活動(dòng)：

給每一個(gè)學(xué)生發(fā)一張心型的紅色卡片，讓他們?cè)谏厦鎸?xiě)上自己的名字。然后，邊說(shuō) “My birthday is in …” 邊貼在相應(yīng)的掛歷上。然后，兩人一組，進(jìn)行談?wù)?“How many birthdays are there in …? There is/ are … birthdays in …

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：Read the main sentences on the blackboard, and the new words..（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Unit1 There is one birthday in May.January February Whose birthday is in January? March April How many days are there in February? May June

Module 7 Unit 2 There are twelve boys on the bike.第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：Vocabulary：July，August，September，October，December，November Sentence：There are twelve months in a year Ability：Let them use these sentences 過(guò)程與方法： Listening, speaking, play games, task-based teaching method 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：Help the pupils to be interested in English.Let the pupils speak English bravely.【重點(diǎn)】：掌握12個(gè)月份的英語(yǔ)單詞。

【難點(diǎn)】：區(qū)分并掌握There are … 和 There is … 的句型?！窘虒W(xué)方法】：講授、游戲Task-based learning method, games, cooperative learning method.【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

一、Greeting Hello , boys and girls.Hello , Miss Zhou.Are you hot ?

No.Are you cold ? Yes , I am cold.I am cold , too.二、Warm-up Let’s look at the blackboard and say.Flowers ,flowers.There are flowers.Festivals , festivals.There are festivals.Birds ,birds.There are birds.Snow , snow.There is snow.Rain ,rain.There is rain.* * * * * 拍節(jié)奏 Warm , It’s warm.Cool , It’s cool.Sunny , It’s sunny.Cold , It’s cold.三、Revision(1)Do the actions and say : play basketball / play football / play football / play table tennis / go to school / listen to musin / watch TV / read a book ……

(2)Let’s review some months : January to June(3)Show me your fingers : Let’s chant : …….（二）探究新知： Lead to It’s very hot in this month.The Summer Holiday is coming!It’s July.July Spell July.…

Do you like July ? Yes , I do./ No , I don’t.I like …… How many days are there in July ? There are thirty-one days in July.August There are thirty-one days in this month , too.It’s August.Is it cold in August ? No , it’s hot in August.The Teachers’ Day is in this month.September Spell September.…

I like September.My birthday is on September.Do you like September ? Yes , I do./ No , I don’t.I like ……

Whose birthday is in September ? Stand up , please!How many birthdays are there in September ？ Let’s count.There are … birthdays in …./ There is … birthdays in ….Guess : Which month is this ? We can see the Chirtmas tree.We have presents.We can sing a song.Christmas Day That’s right!It’s December.December Spell December.…

I don’t like December.It’s cold.Do you like December ? …….Whose birthday is in December ? Stand up , please!How many birthdays are there in December ? There are … birthdays in …./ There is … birthdays in ….There are thirty-one days in this months.The National Day is in this month.October Whose birthday is in October ? Stand up , please!How many birthdays are there in October ? There are … birthdays in …./ There is … birthdays in ….Is it hot in October ? …….Which month is missing ? Let’s count!November Spell November.How many days are there in November ? There are … days in ….Whose birthday is in November ? …….How many birthdays are there in November ? There are … days in ….Let’s read the words again.(1)快速反應(yīng)(2)看口型發(fā)音

（三）鞏固新知：

一、Practice(1)I say I like ….You say I don’t like ….I say I don’t like ….You say I like ….(2)Let’s play a game : Make sentences in one minutes.There are … birthdays in ….There is … birthday in ….Talk to your partners.You can say like this : A : How many days are there in … ? B : There are … days in ….二、Consolidation Talk in your group.You can say like this : I like …./ I don’t like ….It’s … in ….I can … in ….Open your book.Page 40.Listen to the tape , read after the tape.（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本模塊學(xué)習(xí)了一年的十二月份的英文名稱(chēng)，對(duì)學(xué)生有一定的難度

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)： Unit 2 July August How many days are there in July ? September October There are thirty-one days in July.November December There are twelve months in a year.（七）課后反思：

Module 8 Unit 1 We’re going to visit Hainan.第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

1、Enable the Ss to learn some important words.2、Make the Ss understand and use the new sentence : “I’m going to go to… ” “We’re going to go to…”

3、Develop the Ss abilities of listening and speaking.They can make suggestions in life.過(guò)程與方法：

1、Learn the words by game method.2、Teach the text with the task-based method.3、Cooperative learning.情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：

1、Faster the Ss consciousness of good co-operation.2、Keep the Ss confidence in learning English.【重點(diǎn)】：Make the Ss use the following sentences correctly: “I’m going to go to…” “We’re going to go to…” 【難點(diǎn)】：The phrases and the important sentenses

【教學(xué)方法】：講授

1、game method

2、task –based method 3competition1

4、cooperative learning 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：

一、Greeting: Hello,everyone!How are you ? OK, now let’s make warm up, this is just for fun.二、Warm up: I say one, you say two;I say two, you say three;If I say three, you stand up and sit down.Leading in 1.Talk about the cities in China.(pp)2.What’s your favourite city ？

（二）探究新知：

1、Look at the pictures, practice the words about cities.A、Show the picture B、Point and say C、Say it quickly D、Who’s missing?

2、Look at the pictures, the teacher teach the sentenses:I’m going to go to...Let the students repeat the sentenses.(practice the words about cities).3、Teacher do the action and teach: I’m going to ….Then the students follow the teacher.For example: I do and say :I’m going to swim.Then the students repeat:I’m going to swim.a.I do and you say b.I say and you do c.Say it as quickly as you can.4、Look at the pictures and practice.（三）鞏固新知：

1、Listen to the tape: a.Listen and point, then answer the questions the teacher ask.b.Listen and repeat.c.Read together.d.Group play.2.Explain the text.Ss follow me for two times.The teacher will explain the words ,phrases, sentences.Show the key points on the blackboard.3.The teacher asks the Ss to read the text then act it.The teacher can correct the students’ mistakes.Then Ss can find the interest of learning.4、Practice: Make a survey.5、Game: Rememder what I say.（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本模塊我們學(xué)習(xí)了be going to 的表示方法，后面加動(dòng)詞圓形，注意be的變化。

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Module 7 Unit1 We’re going to go to Hainan.I’m going to …

We’re going to … Hainan swim Beijing fly kite Tianjin watch TV

Module 8 Unit 2 Sam is going to ride a horse.第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能：

1）能聽(tīng)懂、會(huì)讀、會(huì)說(shuō)、會(huì)抄寫(xiě)單詞stone, camel ,visit 2）能聽(tīng)懂、會(huì)讀、會(huì)說(shuō)句型:we’re going to do sth.能聽(tīng)懂會(huì)唱歌曲：“We’re going to go to the zoo.” 過(guò)程與方法：任務(wù)型教學(xué)法、情景教學(xué)法。

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：通過(guò)對(duì)本課的學(xué)習(xí)，使學(xué)生了解有關(guān)明陵的歷史、地理位置及其概況的知識(shí)，激發(fā)學(xué)生熱愛(ài)歷史、熱愛(ài)祖國(guó)的熱情。培養(yǎng)學(xué)生認(rèn)真學(xué)語(yǔ)言，樂(lè)于用語(yǔ)言的意識(shí)，并通過(guò)歌曲的學(xué)習(xí)，促進(jìn)學(xué)科間的交流。

【重點(diǎn)】：visit的不同用法 【難點(diǎn)】：stone ,camel, visit 【教學(xué)方法】：講授、游戲，游戲法、合作學(xué)習(xí)法?！菊n時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí)

【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Step1: Warmer 1.Greetings 2.Sing a song--聽(tīng)Module7 unit2的歌曲并跟著老師做動(dòng)作。3.Say a chant: We’re going to We’re going to go to +place

I’m going to I’m going to go to+placeShe is going toShe is going to go to place.He is going to He is going to go to place They are going to They are going to go to place Lead in: I’m going to check your homework.Who

can tell me something about the Ming Tombs.請(qǐng)一兩個(gè)同學(xué)把收集到的有關(guān)the Ming Tombs的資料與其他同學(xué)分享。

資料：明十三陵是明朝遷都北京后13位皇帝陵墓的總稱(chēng)，位于北京市西北約44公里處昌平區(qū)天壽山南麓，陵區(qū)面積達(dá)40多平方公里。從1409年?duì)I建長(zhǎng)陵到清順治初年?duì)I建思陵，長(zhǎng)達(dá)200多年間依次建有長(zhǎng)陵（成祖）、獻(xiàn)陵（仁宗）、景陵（宣宗）、裕陵（英宗）、茂陵（憲宗）、泰陵（孝宗）、康陵（武宗）、永陵（世宗）、昭陵（穆宗）、定陵（神宗）、慶陵（光宗）、德陵（熹宗）、思陵（思宗），故稱(chēng)十三陵。陵內(nèi)計(jì)葬有皇帝13人、皇后23人、皇貴妃１人以及數(shù)十名殉葬皇妃。十三陵是我國(guó)歷代帝王陵寢建筑中保存完整、埋葬皇帝最多的古墓葬群，建筑雄偉，體系完整，歷史悠久，具有極高的歷史和文物價(jià)值。

（二）探究新知：

課文呈現(xiàn)：Ms Smart and her students have been to the Ming Tombs.What did theyn see in the Ming Tombs? – Lions, camels and elephants.T: We’re going to learn the Unit2 We’re going to visit the Ming Tombs.（板書(shū)）

小朋友，你知不知道十三陵景區(qū)有什么有意思的東西。那里有許多動(dòng)物的石雕。那么，石雕包括哪些動(dòng)物？在那里發(fā)生了什么樣的故事？Please open your books and turn to page 28.And then answer my questions –(1).Who are going to visit the Ming Tombs? Ms Smart and her students.(2).When are they going to visit the Ming Tombs? Tomorrow.交代任務(wù)： We can’t visit the Ming Tombs now, but Miss Wang have a good idea——We’re going to go to the zoo and visit animals.Practice

1、Let’s see some animals.（圖片）Teach words: stone ,camel。操練單詞:Game:老師說(shuō)一種動(dòng)物，學(xué)生做動(dòng)作模仿，當(dāng)老師說(shuō)stone+動(dòng)物，學(xué)生暫停不許動(dòng)，然后請(qǐng)一到兩個(gè)同學(xué)說(shuō)動(dòng)物。

2、體會(huì)單詞roar,scary，請(qǐng)學(xué)生模仿動(dòng)物的吼叫聲，老師說(shuō)scary請(qǐng)學(xué)生作害怕?tīng)?，可藏在桌子下?/p>

3、聽(tīng)，跟讀課文。

4、T:Do you like stone animals or alive animals? Ss: Alive animals.T:Let’s see.(出示動(dòng)物卡片)We’re going to visit animals.教單詞visit.5、操練We’re going to visit animal的語(yǔ)言結(jié)構(gòu)。在黑板上畫(huà)動(dòng)物園，請(qǐng)學(xué)生用We’re going to visit+動(dòng)物的語(yǔ)言結(jié)構(gòu)說(shuō)句子，說(shuō)對(duì)的學(xué)生可得到英語(yǔ)書(shū)寫(xiě)的動(dòng)物卡片，并貼在動(dòng)物園他們喜歡的位置。

（三）鞏固新知： 1.請(qǐng)學(xué)生四人為一組，制定游園路線圖，并做匯報(bào)。引導(dǎo)學(xué)生通過(guò)連詞then來(lái)達(dá)到句子的連續(xù)性，和完整性。

e.g.A: We’re going to visit the lions.B: Then we’re going to visit the pandas.2.Game:邀請(qǐng)同學(xué)一起去旅行，幾個(gè)學(xué)生一組，每人想出一個(gè)自己想要去的地方，相互詢(xún)問(wèn)：“I’m going to go to …Do you want to go with me?” 被問(wèn)到的學(xué)生根據(jù)自己的喜好回答。每個(gè)學(xué)生都要努力找到旅伴。

Sing a song 學(xué)唱歌曲We are going to go to the zoo 4 Cooler 請(qǐng)同學(xué)們總結(jié)visit的幾種用法。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：用新穎課文內(nèi)容吸引學(xué)生的興趣，講的是明皇宮，十三陵的故事，繼續(xù)練習(xí)be going to

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Unit 2 We’re going to visit the Ming Tombs.visit be going to I’m giong to visit the Great Wall tomorrow.He/She is going to visit the Ming Tombs tomorrow.They’re going to visit the Summer Palace tomorrow.（七）課后反思：

Module 9 Unit 1 Are you going to run on sports day?

第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能： 1，能聽(tīng)懂，會(huì)說(shuō)日常交際用語(yǔ)：What are you going to do? I am going to…..以及相應(yīng)的回答

2能聽(tīng)懂，會(huì)說(shuō) sports day every day good luck come on winner 等詞 能用一般將來(lái)式的形式簡(jiǎn)單的描述將要發(fā)生的事情。

4培養(yǎng)學(xué)生在游戲中熟練運(yùn)用功能句型和詞組的能力，在情境中靈活運(yùn)用交際用語(yǔ)的能力和知識(shí)遷移的能力。

5會(huì)運(yùn)用 good luck come on等詞對(duì)別人表示祝福。過(guò)程與方法：

1采用活動(dòng)教學(xué)的形式，讓學(xué)生在活動(dòng)中學(xué)習(xí)知識(shí)，促進(jìn)學(xué)生對(duì)句子，詞語(yǔ)的理解。并結(jié)合游戲呈現(xiàn)知識(shí)，以促進(jìn)對(duì)語(yǔ)言的識(shí)記。讓學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)在特定情景中用“what are you going to do?”和“I going to…..”等句型進(jìn)行交際。

3了解如何用英語(yǔ)在比賽中給運(yùn)動(dòng)員鼓勵(lì)、加油的用語(yǔ) 情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：

1、在學(xué)習(xí)本課知識(shí)的過(guò)程中，培養(yǎng)發(fā)散思維、創(chuàng)造思維的能力。2.在教學(xué)游戲中學(xué)會(huì)交際，學(xué)會(huì)鼓勵(lì)他人，學(xué)會(huì)欣賞和贊賞他人 3培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的團(tuán)隊(duì)意識(shí)和合作精神，共同完成學(xué)習(xí)任務(wù)。4 激發(fā)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的興趣,幫助學(xué)生樹(shù)立信心。

【重點(diǎn)】：理解掌握 sports day come on good luck winner 等詞的意義并懂得在實(shí)際語(yǔ)境中運(yùn)用。

【難點(diǎn)】：理解并懂得在日常生活中靈活運(yùn)用 what are you going to do for sports day? I am going to ….等句型進(jìn)行交際

【教學(xué)方法】：講授, 探究式學(xué)習(xí)方法，小組合作交流法,情景教學(xué)法 任務(wù)型教學(xué)法

【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Step1: Warm-up

1、Greeting, say hello to students T: Hi ,boys and girls,today we are happy.Now, let’s play a chat ,ok? 2 Chant “Every Day ”

（Show PPt: We’re going to play football.We’re going to play football every day.We’re going to play basketball.We’re going to play basketball every day.We’re going to swim.We’re going to swim every day.We’re going to play table tennis.We’re going to play table tennis every day.We’re going to run.We’re going to run every day.（Read with the students for two times,then show out the phrases about sports,have the students read and do the actions.）

（二）探究新知：Step2: Presentation 1 Show a picture about a Sports Day,then ask “What are they doing?”(The students answer it.)About “sports day”, show a card “sports day” the students read after the teacher and the teacher write it on the board.3 T: We are going to have a Sports Day.（read and write, the student read after the teacher）.T: Let’s have a look ,what can we do on our Sports Day?（Show PPt：No.1 is playing football.No.2 is playing basketball.No.3 is playing table tennis.No.4 is swimming.No.5 is running the 100 metres.Have the students read the and the teacher translate them.）4 Show PPt “What are you going to do for Sports Day tomorrow ? I’m going to …”

（T： We have a Sports Day ,what are you going to do for Sports Day ? Ask the students guess，then :I’m going to swim.Do the actions.）

Step3: Imitation Practice 1 The teacher read and the students follow.2 Show cards and ask“What are you going to do for Sports Day ?”，The students will say“I’m going to ………” Practice The students practice the consolidations with their deskmates.then play atrain game.（三）鞏固新知：

Step4: Consolidation Practice 1 Actions:have the students make different roles to practice the consolidations.2 Game：Listen to the music and pass the apple.The PPT will show out many sports.When the teacher say “Stop.”The student who get the apple will try to make consolidations on the PPT.Step5: Development Discuss in the the group about four students：“What are you going to do at the weekend ?”Then after that choose aome of them show out their consolidations.Step6 : Sing a song What are you going to do?

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)： 本模塊學(xué)習(xí)be going to 的疑問(wèn)形式。

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Module 8 Unit1 What are you going to do? sports day We are going to have a Sports Day.What are you going to do for Sports Day ? I’m going to …”

Module 9 Unit 2 I’m going to do the high jump.第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】： 知識(shí)與技能： 1)基本能聽(tīng)懂、會(huì)說(shuō)、會(huì)讀、會(huì)寫(xiě)詞匯：do the high jump，do the long jump, run the 200 metres.2)熟練掌握 “What are you going to do for ……？”的言結(jié)構(gòu)及回答：“I’m going to…?”

過(guò)程與方法： 1.Game method 2.The task-based method.3.Cooperative learning.情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生持之以恒的情感態(tài)度。【重點(diǎn)】：詞匯：do the high jump, do the long jump, run the 200 metres.句型：What are you going to do for…? I’m going to… 【難點(diǎn)】：“run the ….”及 “ do the…”的表達(dá)。

【教學(xué)方法】：講授、游戲, 自主式，互助式,啟發(fā)式，任務(wù)型教學(xué) 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入： Step1: Warmer 1.Greetings 2.Sing a song

（二）探究新知： Step2: Presentation 1.Lead in 1)T: What am I going to do? Ss: You are going to swim/run/play table tennis/play basketball/play football.T: What am I going to do? S1: You’re going to do the high jump.T: Yes.I’m going to do the high jump.引出課題：Unit2 I’m going to do the high jump.（板書(shū)）

教授—high jump(1)stamp the word(2)shout the word 2)S2: What am I going to do?（一個(gè)學(xué)生做跳遠(yuǎn)的動(dòng)作）

T: You’re going to do the long jump.教授—long jump(3)clap the word(4)say the word(louder /whisper)

2)T: Daming is going to run the 100 metres on Sports Day.今天，我們要看看Amy, Lingling 和Sam 打算參加運(yùn)動(dòng)會(huì)的哪些項(xiàng)目。Please open your books and turn to page 32.Listen to the tape and then answer my questions.Q1: What is Amy going to do for Sports Day? Q2: What is Sam going to do for Sports Day? Q3: What is Daming going to do for Sports Day? Q4: What is Lingling going to do for Sports Day? S1: Amy is going to do the high jump.S2: Sam is going to do the long jump.S3: Daming is going to run the 100 metres.S4: Lingling is going to run the 200 metres.教授： the 200 metres(1)個(gè)人讀（2）小組讀（3）男生、女生讀 T:What are you going to do for Sports Day? Ss:I’m going to run the 200 metres.（三）鞏固新知：Step 3: Practice 1)Game—幸運(yùn)52 準(zhǔn)備卡片： high jump, long jump, the 100 metres, the 200 metres 等。要求：全班同學(xué)看圖片做動(dòng)作，學(xué)生A和學(xué)生B搶答。2）Game – Guess it S1: What are you going to do? The high jump? S2: Yes, I’m going to do the high jump.（用手勢(shì)表達(dá)high jump 的動(dòng)作）P.S.通過(guò)做手勢(shì)猜對(duì)方要參加的運(yùn)動(dòng)項(xiàng)目。

Step4: Production T： 每4人一小組選派一名組長(zhǎng)，對(duì)組員在體育運(yùn)動(dòng)方面的特長(zhǎng)進(jìn)行調(diào)查，然后安排大家參加運(yùn)動(dòng)會(huì)的各個(gè)項(xiàng)目。

e.g(1)S1: I can run fast.S2: You ‘re going to run the 100 metres.S1: Okay.(2)S3: I can jump high.S4: You’re going to do the high jump.S3: Okay.匯報(bào)：e.g.A and B are going to run the 100 metres.C and D are going to do the high jump.Step5: Say a chant.T: Boys and girls, our Sports Day is coming.Let’s say a chant ,ok? Ss:OK!T&Ss: I’m training for Sports Day.I’m training every day.I’m going to run and I’m going to win.I’m training every day.Come on, come on!Good luck, good luck!Good luck on Sports Day!

Step6: 講解課文 1）全班讀。2）小組讀。

3）分角色扮演。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本模塊學(xué)習(xí)了運(yùn)動(dòng)會(huì)方面的的內(nèi)容，繼續(xù)鞏固了be going to 表示將來(lái)要做的事

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Unit 2 I’m going to do the high jump.run the 100 metres run the 200 metres do the high jump do the long jump

（七）課后反思：

Review

Module Unit 1 Revision

第一課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：學(xué)生掌握方向與位置的詞語(yǔ)；學(xué)會(huì)30以?xún)?nèi)的數(shù)字；掌握表示能力“can”的用法；使用“be going to”講述計(jì)劃。

過(guò)程與方法：學(xué)生在大量練習(xí)中，通過(guò)合作與交流提高綜合運(yùn)用英語(yǔ)語(yǔ)言的能力。

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：培養(yǎng)樂(lè)于助人的道德情操

【重點(diǎn)】：介詞，數(shù)字，“can” 的用法，“be going to”表將來(lái)的用法 【難點(diǎn)】：“be going to”表將來(lái)的用法

【教學(xué)方法】：講授, 合作交流法,任務(wù)型教學(xué)法 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：Step 1:warmer 帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生復(fù)習(xí)Module 2中的韻詩(shī)“Left foot,right foot”,并使用相應(yīng)的課件單詞卡片幫助他們重溫關(guān)于方向和位置的單詞。

（二）探究新知：presentation 1)師根據(jù)韻詩(shī)的內(nèi)容引出“方向”的表達(dá)。老師走下講臺(tái)，同時(shí)對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)： 2)T：Now,I’m walking down my platform.老師走到一位學(xué)生身邊，說(shuō)明自己的位置：“Now I’m next to him/her.I’m on his/her left/right.”老師繼續(xù)向前走，邊走邊說(shuō)”I’m walking past …”

3）請(qǐng)全班完成SB活動(dòng)1，聽(tīng)錄音，并指出錄音中描述的是哪一副圖。

關(guān)于數(shù)字的練習(xí)：

(1)首先根據(jù)數(shù)字卡片帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生復(fù)習(xí)數(shù)字1－29.鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生說(shuō)出更大的數(shù)字，并說(shuō)出這些數(shù)字與自己生活的關(guān)系，例如： I’m ten years old.I have three pens…

(2)完成SB2.請(qǐng)學(xué)生2人一組展開(kāi)游戲。老師說(shuō)明手勢(shì)表示數(shù)字：伸開(kāi)雙手表示10，伸開(kāi)雙手再迅速翻過(guò)來(lái)表示20，然后伸出相應(yīng)個(gè)數(shù)的手指表示個(gè)位數(shù)。分組練習(xí)完成后，老師可以在黑板上快速寫(xiě)出阿拉伯?dāng)?shù)字，讓全班學(xué)生一起說(shuō)出英文單詞。

（三）鞏固新知：

關(guān)于“can/can’t”的練習(xí)

(1)組織學(xué)生以小組為單位調(diào)查其他組成員會(huì)干什么，不會(huì)干什么，例如：Can you play the piano? …

(2)完成SB3.學(xué)生對(duì)話(huà)。關(guān)于一般將來(lái)時(shí)的練習(xí)：(1)T:老師看著表說(shuō)：“It’s …now,Let’s talk about what are you going to do today.”

S: 生可能回答：“I’m going to have Maths.”…(2)完成SB4，把人物與他們打算做的事情連線。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本模塊總體復(fù)習(xí)了前面十個(gè)模塊內(nèi)容，是補(bǔ)充學(xué)習(xí)，為期末考試做準(zhǔn)備。

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Review Module Unit 1 go up/down/straight on Numbers: 1－12 Can you run fast? turn left/right 13－20 Yes,I can./No,I can’t.21－30 Amy is going to take pictures.Review

Module Unit 2 Revision

第二課時(shí)

【教學(xué)目標(biāo)】：

知識(shí)與技能：學(xué)生掌握表示允許的‘can’和表示愿望的‘want’用法；食物、12個(gè)月份和表示天氣狀況的單詞；現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)。

過(guò)程與方法：學(xué)生在大量練習(xí)中，通過(guò)合作與交流提高綜合運(yùn)用英語(yǔ)語(yǔ)言的能力。

情感、態(tài)度和價(jià)值觀：培養(yǎng)團(tuán)結(jié)合作的精神。

【重點(diǎn)】：表示允許的‘can’和表示愿望的‘want’用法；食物、12個(gè)月份和表示天氣狀況的單詞；現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)的用法

【難點(diǎn)】：現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)的用法

【教學(xué)方法】：講授、游戲 , 合作交流法,任務(wù)型教學(xué)法 【課時(shí)安排】：1課時(shí) 【教學(xué)過(guò)程】：

（一）導(dǎo)入：:warmer 帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生復(fù)習(xí)關(guān)于月份的韻詩(shī),并使用相應(yīng)的課件單詞卡片幫助他們重溫關(guān)月份單詞。

（二）探究新知：presentation(1)師根據(jù)韻詩(shī)的內(nèi)容引出12個(gè)月份表達(dá)。組織展開(kāi)SB Unit2 活動(dòng)1中的游戲。具體操作如下：老師在黑板上寫(xiě)出12個(gè)月份的英文單詞（打亂順序），讓學(xué)生6人一組，每輪游戲前請(qǐng)兩組學(xué)生分別站到黑板的兩側(cè)；發(fā)給每組第一名學(xué)生一個(gè)黑板擦，此外還要請(qǐng)一名學(xué)生為兩隊(duì)記分。老師快速，隨機(jī)的說(shuō)出一個(gè)月份單詞，兩隊(duì)學(xué)生第一名聽(tīng)到后迅速擦掉那個(gè)單詞，擦去的組得分，沒(méi)有擦到的學(xué)生淘汰掉；接下來(lái)由剛才擦去單詞的學(xué)生說(shuō)出單詞，黑板擦交給同組的下一名學(xué)生。如此重復(fù)，直到有一組學(xué)生全部被淘汰為止

(2)擴(kuò)展游戲：按照上面的方法，把英文單詞換成數(shù)字1－12，增加游戲難度。

(3)師把話(huà)題從月份引向天氣狀況，請(qǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)出自己生日的月份，并描述天氣。例如：“My birthday is in…It’s warm/hot/cool/cold…”

（三）鞏固新知：

關(guān)于食物的單詞、表示允許的’can’和表示愿望的’want’的練習(xí)：(1)老師出示卡片，復(fù)習(xí)有關(guān)食物的單詞，然后請(qǐng)學(xué)生兩人一組完成SB 2 的對(duì)話(huà)。

(2)根據(jù)這些食物，用‘want’造句，例如：I want a cake…體會(huì)can和want的用法。

關(guān)于現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)的練習(xí)

(1)T:老師看著表說(shuō)：‘It’s …O’clock now,what are we doing?’ S:We are having English class.復(fù)習(xí)現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)的表達(dá)，并讓學(xué)生造句。

(2)完成SB3.聽(tīng)錄音并描述對(duì)話(huà)。

(3)展開(kāi)SB Unit 2 活動(dòng)4的游戲，老師描述圖中的人物，請(qǐng)學(xué)生猜一猜老師描述的是誰(shuí)。

（四）作業(yè)布置：

（五）小結(jié)：本課我們復(fù)習(xí)了表示允許的‘can’和表示愿望的‘want’用法；食物、12個(gè)月份和表示天氣狀況的單詞；現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)的用法，希望大家能夠掌握。

（六）板書(shū)設(shè)計(jì)：

Review Module Unit 2

月份 A:Can I have some…? This is Lingling’s family.B:Yes, you can./Sorry,you can’t.Mum is making a cake.（七）課后反思：

第四篇：外研版九年級(jí)上冊(cè)英語(yǔ)全冊(cè)教案

三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Module 1 Wonders of the world Unit 1

What is a wonder of the world? 上課教師 學(xué)生年級(jí)

教

材

課

時(shí) 教

學(xué)

設(shè)

計(jì) 課

型 Listening and speaking 教材分析 This unit aims to review the learnt tenses so far and help students to be able to present some important and creative ideas about writing a school magazine.教學(xué)目標(biāo) To learn and understand the topic words through talking and listening.To know something about the pyramids and the Grand Canyon.To understand the conversation about starting a school magazine involving different tenses.知識(shí)與能力 1.Vocabulary and expressions: ancient, club, composition, pupil, meeting, call, event, listen up.That’s news to me.Anyone else? 2.To enable the Ss to express in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To learn to give ideas on writing a school magazine.過(guò)程與方法 1.Top-down approach, enabling Ss to understand and talk about writing a school magazine.2.To learn by listening, speaking and discussing.情感、態(tài)度 與價(jià)值觀 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to know more about writing a school magazine of their own.教學(xué)過(guò)程

教學(xué)步驟 教師活動(dòng)

學(xué)生活動(dòng)

活動(dòng)目的

Step 1 Lead-in Start the lesson by showing groups of pictures about the wonders of the world on the screen including the ancient pyramids.Ask students to talk about the picture on Page 2.T: Where can you see the pictures and the brief introduction probably?(Newspaper / the Internet / Magazine…)

T: Yes, magazines like Crazy English / National Geography…

Who started…? Learn the new vocabulary.(ancient, pyramid, review, wonder…)

Have a talk about the picture using the words in Activity 1.Learn a bit about magazines.Get the Ss to be attentive and focus on the theme of the lesson.(Magazine)Step 2 Listening & Vocabulary Play the tape and check the words.Listen to the tape again.Make up possible questions according to the answers.Give examples.Listen and check the words.Make up questions according to the given answers.(Wh-questions)Practise listening and get specific information.Check their understanding by making questions.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Step 3.Listen & read Play the tape for the 1st time.Ask Ss questions.T: What are the children doing?

Is there a school magazine in

Da Ming’s school? the 1st time.Play the tape again and ask students to decide T OR F.① Crazy feet is a band.② Becky Wang started a school magazine.③ Da Ming watched the interview on TV yesterday ④ Tony is writing a composition.Listen more carefully for the 2nd time.Decide whether they are true or false.Check the answers with the class.Listen for the specific information and understand the details of the conversation.Step 4.Read Play the tape again and get Ss to practise the conversation.Check the language points.Focus on everyday English and useful expressions.(Listen up, Anyone else? do some review, do an interview, on=about, get better grades)Get Ss to make a list of the articles in magazines.Check the answers in Activity 4.Read the conversation aloud, and read in role.Answer the questions in Activity 4.Practise reading and go over how to give suggestions when in discussion.Learn more about writing a school magazine.Step 5.Pair work Go through the five questions and highlight the key words.Ask for more answers on Question 3.Ss take turns to answer the questions.Consolidate the key words and transit to the next step by Question 3.Step 6.Discussion Tell the Ss: If your school decides to start a magazine, what are you going to write about? And why? They can make up lists and take Activity 3 as an example.Report their discussion.Work out the lists and talk about their plans to write the magazine.Beginning: Our school will start a magazine.What articles are you going to write...Learn

to Listen to the tape and get the answers.Listen to get a general idea for discuss in the way as the children do.Check Ss’ creativity.作業(yè) 布置 Collect information about the seven wonders of the world.(Pictures and brief introductions)板書(shū) 設(shè)計(jì) Unit 1 What is a wonder of the world?

school magazine

That’s news to me!

a wonder

What’s it about?

ancient pyramids

listen up

write a composition

Any more ideas?/ Anyone else?

do some reviews about…

on=about

do an interview with 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Unit 2

Ｉwas on the edge of the Grand Canyon.上課教師 學(xué)生年級(jí)

教

材

課

時(shí) 教

學(xué)

設(shè)

計(jì) 課型 教材 分析 Reading and writing By example this unit presents a good way to describe what one sees and feels after a journey.It can help students to know more about the Grand Canyon, and inspire Ss to love and explore the natural wonders.教學(xué) 目標(biāo) To get information from the reading material about the Grand Canyon;To learn the way of writing about what you see and your feelings when traveling;

知識(shí)與能力 1.Vocabulary and expressions: waterfall, stranger, rock, ground, canyon, reply, rise, face, get out of, look over, disappear into, look(across)to?light-dark, clear, huge, beside, below, at the bottom of, reach the top.?too?to?

2.To enable the Ss to express in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To love the wonders of the natural world and give facts and opinions.過(guò)程方法 1.Interactive approach.2.To improve Ss reading skills and get them to talk and practise writing by imitating.情感、態(tài)度與價(jià)值觀 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to write a description of a wonder that they have seen or visited.教學(xué)過(guò)程

教學(xué)步驟 教師活動(dòng)

學(xué)生活動(dòng)

活動(dòng)目的

Step 1 Lead-in Ask Ss to show information about the seven natural wonders.(The teacher can get the related pictures ready beforehand)Present words in Activity 1.Talk and give facts about the wonders.Encourage Ss to describe with the words given.Check up Ss’ homework and start the new topic.(Wonders)Step 2.Ask and answer Ask Ss to make questions about facts of the natural wonders.Demonstrate and get Ss to follow.Ask and answer.How tall/deep… is it? It’s…meters tall/deep.Practise asking about detailed information and learn the sentence pattern.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Step 3.Read(Skimming)

Tell Ss to read the passage in Activity 2.Find out the name of the wonder and its facts.T: Where did the writer visit?

How deep/wide/long is it? Read the passage and answer the questions.Find out the facts and write them down in Activity 5.Practise reading skills and get specific information.Step 4 Read

and match Play the tape and get Ss to follow silently.Find out the main idea of each paragraph.Present the five topic sentences on the screen(Bb).A.The writer arrived there on the rainy

morning;B.The first impression/sight of the

Grand Canyon.C.The Grand Canyon is the greatest

wonder in his opinion.D.Details about the Grand Canyon.E.After minutes’ walk, he came to it.Ss follow the lines and match the topic sentences to the paragraphs.(or they can conclude the main idea by themselves if possible)Read for the main idea of each paragraph.Learn to sum up and help to understand the whole passage.Step 5 Read aloud Get Ss to read aloud after the tape and find the details about the trip.① When did he get to the Grand

Canyon? ② Why was there nothing to see? ③ Where was he facing on the edge of

the Grand Canyon? ④ How did he feel about the Canyon? Read aloud and answer questions in Activity 3.Ask for help if they have any problems.Practise reading and learn about the details, check their understanding.Step 6.Focus Now get Ss’ attention to those phrasal verbs and prepositional phrases.Try to check by a gap-filling exercise.(get out of, go through, look over, fall away, on the edge of, look down/across to, at the bottom of, 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

disappear into, ask oneself)Learn the verbs and phrases.Practising using them with the help of the gap-filling.Focus on the phrasal verbs and prepositions.Step 7.Match Activity 4 Ask Ss to find these words in the passage and guess their meaning within the sentence.Underline the words and match the English meaning.Practise guessing the meaning of words in the context.Step 8.Writing Tell Ss to imagine they have seen(some of them did see)one of the wonders of the world.Write sentences describing how they felt.Remind them of the four keywords: saw, size, happened, felt.First get them to work in pairs and then report the sentences or passage if possible.Write sentences according to the given beginning.Report their answers and try to make them

into a passage.Practise writing and using the language on the basis of imaging and personal experience.作業(yè) 布置 Finish writing the description of one of the wonders of the world, trying to collect some details and take the text as a model.板書(shū) 設(shè)計(jì) Unit 2 I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon The seven natural wonders of the world How tall/wide/deep is it? It’s…tall/wide/tall.get out of

on the edge of

ask oneself go through

look down/across to

huge=very very big look over

at the bottom of

the greatest wonder fall away

disappear into

Unit 3 Language in use

上課教師

學(xué)生年級(jí) 教

材

課

時(shí)

教

學(xué)

設(shè)

計(jì) 課型 Revision and application 教材 分析 This unit serves to give a review and summary towards the language points learnt in U1&.2.And it helps to clarify the exact differences among tenses.教學(xué) 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

目標(biāo) To review and check the words learned in this module;To summarise and consolidate tenses learnt before;知識(shí) 與 能力 1.Vocabulary and expressions: height, lift, view, attract, description, location, design

2.To enable the Ss to differ the tenses learned in situations.3.To make a poster of a wonder of the world/ one’s hometown.過(guò)程

方法 1.Formal and interactive practice, task-based.2.Comprehensive ways of practising and consolidating.情感、態(tài)度與

價(jià)值觀 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world;To make a poster of a wonder of the world or his hometown and help to love one’s motherland.教學(xué)步驟 教師活動(dòng) 學(xué)生活動(dòng) 活動(dòng)目的

教學(xué)過(guò)程

Step 1 Revision Ask Ss to watch and listen to the MV Chinese by Andy Lau.Get them to find out the wonder in it.Encourage Ss to describe what they see in it , e.g.The Great Wall is a great wonder.Andy Lau went to the Great Wall.He was singing on it.He has sung many popular songs.… Watch and talk about things appear in the MV.Learn to tell the differences among the tenses.Help to establish the concepts of tenses in situations.Step 2.Grammar focus 1.Read through the sentences in the box with the whole class.Call back ideas about the structure highlighted from the students.2.Give hand-out to Ss and ask them to match the exact meaning with the corresponding sentence.(Activity 1)Check the answers right after that.1.Read aloud the seven sentences.And tell the making-up of each tense.2.Read through the 5 pairs of sentences in different tenses and match.Practise telling the differences and meanings.Step 3.Writing

1.Go back to the picture of the Great Wall.Give examples by matching the three parts.The Great Wall + is + about 6,700 km long.Give Ss tips on how to decide.2.Encourage Ss to observe and decide the forms of verbs in different tenses.1.Observe the 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

subjects and the adverbial or even the phrasal verbs.Match the three parts to make possible sentences.2.Read through the uncompleted passage and try to give the correct forms of verbs in the situations.Learn to observe and practise language in different tenses.Step 4 Speaking 1.Show up the photo of visiting the Great Wall.Get Ss to ask the teacher questions in Activity 4.(Example)Get Ss to work in pairs, and ask and answer the questions.2.Present wonders in the local area.Get Ss to talk about them.1.Ss follow the teacher and make up their own conversations.Perform in front of the class.2.Learn the example in Activity 5 and make a similar introduction to the wonders in local area.Practise speaking and enable Ss to use the language and understand its meaning.Step 5 Vocabulary Game Present nine pictures about wonders of the world, each of which links an exercise in Activity 6/8.Get Ss to finish them first and check in forms of game.Elaborate on the Pyramids in Egypt.(More related photos)

Finish the multiple-choices exercises and choose the pictures they’re interested in to check the answers.With the help of games, Ss can review the phrasal verbs and concepts of tenses.Step 6.Listening Present the three photos in Activity 7 Ask about facts about any one of them.Play the tape for Ss to learn more.Listen and match the notes with the photos.Check the answers after listening and report about the three wonders with the help of the table.Learn more about the three wonders, practising describing.Step 7.Around the world Get Ss to look at the picture and read silently through the introduction.Give questions to check their understanding.Read and decide, trying to grasp the main information.Learn about another wonder of the world.Step 8.Module task Tell Ss to work in groups of 4.Read through the instructions.Help them to decide what to write about.Hold up a show-and-tell session where Ss can display and discuss.Work in groups of 4 and write about one wonder they like.Collect sufficient information and make the poster.Take part in the show-and-tell session.Take this task as an extensive learning activity to get Ss to learn more about the wonders.作業(yè) 布置 Finish off the poster after class and get ready for the show at the back wall of the classroom.Prepare the show-and-tell session in groups of four.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

板書(shū) 設(shè)計(jì) Unit 3 Language in use

Structures of different tenses

ancient

The Great Wall is a wonder…

modern

wonders

Andy Lau went to the Great Wall.natural

He was singing on it

height—What’s the height of…?

We are listening to him now.on the journey of…

He has sung many pop songs.because / because of He will visit it some other day.Module 2 Great books

一、教學(xué)內(nèi)容分析

本模塊的話(huà)題是談?wù)摃?shū)、作家、思想家、戲劇、電影、詩(shī)歌等。語(yǔ)法是一般現(xiàn)在時(shí)被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)。

二、學(xué)情分析 談?wù)摃?shū)、作家、思想家等是學(xué)生感興趣的話(huà)題。本模塊的學(xué)習(xí)是通過(guò)該話(huà)題的討論，學(xué)習(xí)并掌握一般現(xiàn)在時(shí)被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的肯定句、否定句、一般疑問(wèn)句和特殊疑問(wèn)句。

三、教學(xué)目標(biāo)

1、語(yǔ)言知識(shí)目標(biāo): ● 功能：談?wù)摃?shū)、作家、思想家等。

● 詞匯：1）能正確使用下列單詞：work,influence,respect,wise,literature, behaviour,cave,freedom,funeral,social,theme,treasure,clever,dead，pleased, alive, southern, state.2)理解下列單詞：thinker, monthly, outsider, version, historical，editor, publisher, reviewer.3）能準(zhǔn)確理解并使用下列詞組；as far as,not?any more,millions of，run away, grow up, talk about, be known as/for ● 語(yǔ)法：一般現(xiàn)在時(shí)被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)。

2、語(yǔ)言技能目標(biāo)

聽(tīng)：通過(guò)聽(tīng)進(jìn)行單詞和圖片的配對(duì)。

說(shuō)：談?wù)撟钕矚g的書(shū)、戲劇、詩(shī)歌和作家等。

讀：能讀懂對(duì)書(shū)、作家、思想家等作介紹的文章，能掌握從文章到表格 的信息轉(zhuǎn)移。

寫(xiě)：寫(xiě)一本自己最喜歡的書(shū)。

3、情感目標(biāo)：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生閱讀的習(xí)慣，提高個(gè)人文化修養(yǎng)。

4、文化意識(shí)目標(biāo)：了解中外著名的作家、思想家、詩(shī)人及他們的作品。三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

四、教學(xué)重點(diǎn)、難點(diǎn)

重點(diǎn)：key vocabulary___work, influence,wise,clever,behaviour,dead,alive,treasure

theme, southern,as far as,not…any more,millions of,run away,grow up,talk

about, be known as/for 難點(diǎn)：被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的構(gòu)成和用法，主動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)如何改為被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)。

五、課時(shí)安排 第一課時(shí)：Unit 1 第二課時(shí)；Unit 2 第三課時(shí)：Unit 3 第四、五課時(shí)：Review and workbook

Unit 1 Confucius’ works are read by many people Teaching aims :Learn the use of present simple passive.Key points: work, influence, thought, wise, copy, as far as, not…any more, millions of, be known as/for Difficult sentences: Shakespeare’s works are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain was an important writer, but he isn’t known as a great thinker like Confucius.Step 1 Warming up& leading in 1.Ask the students some questions.Do you like reading books? What’s your favourite book？Who’s your favourite writer?

2.Show three pictures about Confucius, Shakespeare and Mark Twain.Let them guess who they are.Can you say something about them? Teach the words : work, influence, play, poem, respect, thinker, thought, wise, writer.Confucius: He was a great thinker in China.He is known for his wise thought.We are

still influenced by his thought.He is respected by us.Shakespeare: He was a writer of plays and poems.Some of his most famous plays are Hamlet and Romeo and Juliet.He was born in 1564 in England.His plays are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain: He was a famous American writer.He wrote a lot of stories.His books are still popular.For example ,The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.3.Do Activity 5.Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words.Step 2 Listening(Act.1&2)1.First read the words in the box.Then match the words in the box with the people in the pictures.(Act.1)2.Listen and check your answer to Act.1.(Act.2)step 3 Listening and reading(Act.3、4)1.Listen and answer.Where are the speakers? What are they talking about? 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè).Read and answer the questions.(Act.4)3.Everyday English and language points.What’s up? Go on!Sounds like a good idea.as far as, not …any more, millions of ,be known as/for 4.Read the conversation in two groups.Step 4 Grammar practice 1.Underline the sentences in the conversation that have the pattern of passive voice.2.Read the sentences aloud.3.Do WB Exercise 1 on p116 Step 5 Speaking and writing 1.Do Act.8 Work in groups of three and look at the opinions in the table.Report ideas of your group to the whole class.2.Do Act.6 Talk about your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.Homework 1.write your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.2.Listen and read the conversation.3.Search the internet about the book called The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.Unit 2 It’s still read and loved

Teaching aims practice reading skills.Try to write a passage about your favourite great book.Key points run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death Difficult sentences 1.The themes of the story are to do with children growing up and becoming more serious 2.It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.Step 1 Warming up & leading in 1.Read the conversation you learned yesterday with your partner.Then answer the questions according to the conversation.What did Betty suggest at the end of the conversation in Unit 1? What’s Mr.Jackson’s favourite book?

2.Ask the students if they have read the book before.What happens in the book? What are the main ideas of the book? Show some pictures of the book and tell the story..Teach the new words: behaviour, cave,freedom,funeral,outsider,pretty,social,theme，treasure, nineteen century Step 2 Reading 1.Read the passage quickly and answer the questions.Where can you read the passage? Why does Mr.Jackson like the book? 2.Read the passage again and complete the table with the information about it.(Act.3)3.Read and answer the questions.(Act.4)Step 3 Read aloud and language points

1.Play the tape for the students to listen and read.2.Get the students to read each paragraph and discuss the useful words and expressions.run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death

It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.Step 4 Writing 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

1.Work in pairs.Would you like to read The Adventures of Tom Sawyer ? Why/ Why not? 2.Think of your favourite great book you have read.Complete the table in Act.3 3.Write a passage about your favourite great book.My favourite great book is Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone by J.K.Rowling.It’s a story about a young boy… Home work 1.Listen to the tape and practice reading the passage aloud.2.Write a passage about your favourite great book.Unit 3 Language in use Teaching aims Language practice Key points Seeing a play is more interesting than seeing a film.First…then…,next…,after that…,finally… Difficult points The use of passive voice.Step1 Revision 1.Read the passage in Unit 2 2.Show the passage about your favourite great book.Step 2 Vocabulary(Act.5&8)1.Read through the words or phrases in the box with the whole class.2.Ask the students to complete the passages, then check them.Step 3 Grammar 1.Ask the students to read the sentences in the box.2.Grammar teaching The teacher helps students understand the passive voice 1)被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的構(gòu)成：be +過(guò)去分詞

時(shí)態(tài)在be 體現(xiàn)：am /is /are +done, was / were + done, have/has been +done 被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的句型：

肯定句：主語(yǔ)+be +過(guò)去分詞+（by ~）

否定句：主語(yǔ)+be not +過(guò)去分詞+（by ~）一般疑問(wèn)句：Be+主語(yǔ)+過(guò)去分詞+（by ~）

特殊疑問(wèn)句：特殊疑問(wèn)詞+ be+主語(yǔ)+過(guò)去分詞+（by ~）

2)被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的用法：

I.要表達(dá)“被?”、”受?”、“遭?”、“讓?”之類(lèi)的語(yǔ)義。如： 教師很受尊敬—The teachers are well respected.II.強(qiáng)調(diào)動(dòng)作承受者。如：

他遠(yuǎn)近聞名—He is known far and wide.III.不知道或沒(méi)有必要指出動(dòng)作的執(zhí)行者。如：

房子每天都有人打掃_(dá)_The room is cleaned every day.3)主動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)如何改為被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)：

Children

love

these songs

主動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài) 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

These songs

are loved

by children

被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài) 3．Practice Do Act.1,2,3,4 and WB P117 Ex.4&5 Step 4 Listening and speaking(Act.6&7)1.Ask the students to go through the table.2.Listen and check the statements about Betty and Daming agree with.3.Work in pairs.Ask and say which statements you agree with, and why._ __Do you think that modern books are great books? __Yes, I do.I think …/No, I don’t.I think…

Step 5 Reading

Read ―Around the world ‖ on P17 and answer the questions.When and where did Plato live? What was he? Where did he travel? What did he do when he returned to Athens? What are his works called? Step 6 Module task Discussion: Are we more influenced by films than by books? 1.Decide on your point of view.2.Think of some examples of films or books you have seen or read.How did they influence you? Homework: 1.Do Ex.2&3 on WB P116 2.Revise Module 2

Review of Module 7 and workbook Step 1 Revision 1.Revise the words and expressions you learned in the module.2.Do self-assessment on P119.3.Do Ex 6,7,8 to check their vocabulary.Step 2 Listening and pronunciation.1.Listen and check the true sentences.(Ex 9 on P118)2.Listen and repeat.(Ex 10 on P118)Step 3 Reading 1.Read and answer the questions.(Ex 11 on P118)2.Listen and read it again.Let the students ask more questions about Dickens.Then answer them.Step 4 Grammar 1.Check Ex 2&3 on P116 to revise the passive voice.2.Do some more exercises about it.Module 3 Sporting life

一、教材內(nèi)容分析：

本模塊以體育運(yùn)動(dòng)及奧運(yùn)會(huì)為話(huà)題，通過(guò)談?wù)揃IG與HAS間的前一次和下一次籃球比三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

賽（Unit 1），介紹劉翔的成長(zhǎng)歷程（Unit 2）及奧運(yùn)會(huì)（Unit 3）展開(kāi)教學(xué)。要求掌握一般過(guò)去時(shí)和一般將來(lái)時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)；學(xué)習(xí)與體育運(yùn)動(dòng)相關(guān)的詞匯及日常用語(yǔ)等。通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)，放眼時(shí)事，體會(huì)體育明星光環(huán)背后所付出的勤奮與努力。

二、學(xué)情分析：

本模塊圍繞籃球等體育運(yùn)動(dòng)及奧運(yùn)會(huì)而展開(kāi)，又正直北京奧運(yùn)會(huì)倒計(jì)時(shí)之際。相信學(xué)生對(duì)此內(nèi)容會(huì)頗感興趣。同時(shí)介紹了劉翔的成長(zhǎng)歷程，聯(lián)系現(xiàn)實(shí)，闡明體育競(jìng)技的偉大及體育訓(xùn)練的艱辛，努力是將來(lái)成功的基石。

被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)共分三個(gè)模塊講授，本模塊第二次涉及這一內(nèi)容，可謂承上啟下。要求學(xué)生在熟練運(yùn)用各種時(shí)態(tài)的基礎(chǔ)上，將時(shí)態(tài)與語(yǔ)態(tài)相結(jié)合，需反復(fù)操練。在鞏固一般現(xiàn)在時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的基礎(chǔ)上學(xué)習(xí)一般過(guò)去時(shí)和一般將來(lái)時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)，并為學(xué)習(xí)現(xiàn)在完成時(shí)和情態(tài)動(dòng)詞的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)作好鋪墊。

三、教學(xué)目標(biāo):

語(yǔ)言知識(shí)目標(biāo):(1)詞匯：allow/defeat/stand for/against/tough/encourage/medal/record/set up/ first of all/represent/advertisement/coach/regularly/race(2)日常用語(yǔ)：You’ve got no chance!/What do you reckon?/Don’t let them get to you!/Nice work!(3)語(yǔ)法：一般過(guò)去時(shí)與一般將來(lái)時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)。

(4)話(huà)題：討論有關(guān)體育運(yùn)動(dòng)與奧運(yùn)會(huì)的話(huà)題以及體育明星的成長(zhǎng)歷程。

語(yǔ)言技能目標(biāo)：

聽(tīng)：通過(guò)對(duì)話(huà)與課文等的聽(tīng)力訓(xùn)練，理解簡(jiǎn)單的體育運(yùn)動(dòng)信息。

說(shuō)：通過(guò)對(duì)文本等的學(xué)習(xí)，輔以問(wèn)答及討論等形式反復(fù)操練，學(xué)會(huì)簡(jiǎn)單講述某名人的成長(zhǎng)歷程。

讀：提高閱讀能力，掌握文本精髓。

寫(xiě)：作一份關(guān)于班級(jí)內(nèi)同學(xué)參加體育運(yùn)動(dòng)或觀看體育比賽的調(diào)查報(bào)告。寫(xiě)一篇關(guān)于體育明星成長(zhǎng)歷程的簡(jiǎn)單報(bào)道。情感態(tài)度目標(biāo)：

通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)，加強(qiáng)團(tuán)隊(duì)合作精神的培養(yǎng)，調(diào)動(dòng)學(xué)生良性競(jìng)爭(zhēng)的意識(shí)及英語(yǔ)學(xué)習(xí)的積極性。了解有關(guān)體育運(yùn)動(dòng)和競(jìng)技比賽的要素；了解奧運(yùn)會(huì)特別是即將舉行的北京2008年奧運(yùn)會(huì)的相關(guān)信息；了解當(dāng)代體育明星成功的奮斗歷程，用理性的思維體會(huì)成功背后的艱辛與努力，指導(dǎo)青少年學(xué)生的個(gè)人成長(zhǎng)。

四、教學(xué)重點(diǎn)及難點(diǎn)：

(一)掌握與體育運(yùn)動(dòng)等相關(guān)的詞匯、句型及日常用語(yǔ)。

(二)掌握一般過(guò)去時(shí)與一般將來(lái)時(shí)被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的運(yùn)用。通過(guò)各種題型的反復(fù)操練，掌握其與一般現(xiàn)在時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的不同用法。

(三)簡(jiǎn)單撰寫(xiě)某體育明星的一段成長(zhǎng)經(jīng)歷或成功史。

五、課時(shí)安排： Period 1: Unit 1 Period 2: Unit 1-2 Period 3: Unit 2 Period 4: Unit 3 Period 5: Unit 3 Unit 1 When will the match be held? ⅠTeaching model Listening and speaking 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

ⅡTeaching method Communicative approach ⅢTeaching aims Key words: allow, defeat, train, tough, chance, reckon, mad Key Phrases: stand for, get to Everyday English: a tough match You’ve got no chance!What do you reckon? Don’t let them get to you!

Nice work!ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, pictures, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step1 Warming-up and listening

1.Look at the pictures and talk something about sports.2.Look at the photos and describe them.You can use some of the words in the box to help you.3.Listen and check the words you hear in Activity 2.Step 2 Listen and read 1.Listen to the tape carefully.2.Ask the students to read through the conversation individually.3.Play the tape and have them read and follow.4.Act it out.5.Learn Everyday English.Step 3 Do Exercises 1.Complete the table in Activity 4.2.Listen again and check.3.Complete the sentences in Activity 5.Step 4 Work in pairs

Read the sentences from the conversation.Say who the underlined words refer to in Activity 6.Step 5 Explain the important and difficult points

Don’t let them get to you, Tony!不要讓他們影響你,托尼!

get to sb.意思是to make someone feel upset or angry,即“讓某人感到煩惱,困擾”。如: The heat was beginning to get to me so I went indoors.天氣很熱,讓我開(kāi)始感到煩躁,所以我回到了屋內(nèi)。

The smell of her old book really gets to me after a while!過(guò)了一會(huì)兒,她的舊書(shū)散發(fā)出的氣味實(shí)在讓我不舒服。

Step 6 Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.Make sure you pause between each sense group in Activity 7.2.Say the sentence in Activity 8.3.Work in pairs.Talk about your favourite sports team or sports star this season.Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.1, 2, 3, 4&5.Unit 2 Liu Xiang was trained for gold.ⅠTeaching model Reading and writing ⅡTeaching method Bottom-up approach ⅢTeaching aims 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Key vocabulary : encourage , medal , set , set up , yearbook , represent , advertisement , coach , sportsman , overnight , skill , hurdling , sportswoman , race Grammar : 一般過(guò)去時(shí)和一般將來(lái)時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài) ⅣTeaching aids OHP, tape recorder ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Warming-up 1.Guessing game: The Chinese champions in the Olympic Games.2.Talk something about Liu Xiang.3.Show some pictures.Look at the pictures and the title of the passage.Say what you know about Liu Xiang and how he became a sporting hero.4.Introduce the new words.Step 2 Reading 1.Read the passage in Activity 2.2.Play the tape and have them read and follow.3.Read the passage again.Step 3 Do exercises 1.Read the passage and choose the sentence which best expresses the main idea.Liu Xiang____.a)was helped by his sports school to become a gold medal winner b)will be encouraged to be a star and not a sporting hero c)has trained for many years , and will continue to win medals 2.Complete the time line with the notes in Activity 3.3.Answer the questions in Activity 4.1)As a symbol, what does Liu Xiang represent? 2)Why isn’t Liu Xiang an overnight success? 3)What was Liu Xiang advised to do in 1998? 4)What was the special programme set up in 2001? 5)What will he be encouraged to do in the future? Step 4 Explain the important and difficult points

1.And now that he's well known all over the world, Liu Xiang will also be asked to appear in advertisements and films, and even to record music.現(xiàn)在由于劉翔已經(jīng)世界聞名了,他還會(huì)被邀請(qǐng)做廣告,拍電影,甚至錄唱片。

now that 常常用為一種新的情況或狀況做出解釋,表示“既然；由于”。如: Now that Mr Liu has arrived , we can begin our meeting.既然劉先生已經(jīng)到了,我們就開(kāi)會(huì)吧。2.Liu was encouraged at first to train as a high jumper.起初,教練支持劉翔練跳高。

encourage sb.to do sth.表示“鼓勵(lì)某人做某事”。在本句中,encourage一詞用于被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài),表示劉翔是“被鼓勵(lì)”去某事,而不是他“鼓勵(lì)”別的人去做某事。如: Ms Wang always encourages us to speak English in class.王老師總是鼓勵(lì)我們課

上講英語(yǔ)。

We were encouraged to learn foreign languages at school.學(xué)校鼓勵(lì)我們學(xué)習(xí)外語(yǔ)。3.It was set up in 2001 to help young sportsmen and sportswomen.它(特殊項(xiàng)目)建立于2001年,用來(lái)幫助年輕運(yùn)動(dòng)員。

set up表示“建立,設(shè)立;創(chuàng)辦(組織,企業(yè));制定(計(jì)劃等)如:

She plans to set up her own business.她計(jì)劃企業(yè)辦自己的企業(yè)。三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

We need to set a meeting to discuss the plan.我們需要開(kāi)個(gè)會(huì)來(lái)討論這個(gè)計(jì)劃。4.Grammar : 一般過(guò)去時(shí)和一般將來(lái)時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)

英語(yǔ)的語(yǔ)態(tài)是通過(guò)動(dòng)詞形式的變化表現(xiàn)出來(lái)的。英語(yǔ)中有兩種語(yǔ)態(tài)：主動(dòng)語(yǔ) 態(tài)和被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)。主動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)表示主語(yǔ)是動(dòng)作的執(zhí)行者。例如： Many people speak Chinese.謂語(yǔ)：speak的動(dòng)作是由主語(yǔ)many people來(lái)執(zhí)行的。

被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)表示主語(yǔ)是動(dòng)作的接受者，即行為動(dòng)作的對(duì)象。例如： Chinese is spoken by many people.主語(yǔ)Chinese是動(dòng)詞speak的接受者。1)一般過(guò)去時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)構(gòu)成： was/were＋p.p.（過(guò)去分詞）eg: Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.Liu Xiang’s races were recorded.2)一般將來(lái)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)構(gòu)成： shall/will be＋p.p.（過(guò)去分詞）eg: Liu Xiang will be encouraged to go for more medals for China.Will he be encouraged to spend more time away from sport? 5.Learning to learn Step 5 Writing 1.Rewrite the notes in Activity 3 in full sentences.2.Look at the sentences in Activity 6.A special programme helped Liu Xiang.Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.His skill at hurdling was noticed by his coach Sun Haiping.His coach Sun Haiping noticed his skill at hurdling.3.Write sentences about Zhang Yining's training.4.Join the sentences you wrote in Activity 6 to write a paragraph about Zhang Yining.Use and, although and because.Step6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.6, 7, 8&9.Unit 3 Language in use ⅠTeaching model Revision and application ⅡTeaching method

Formal and interactive practice ⅢTeaching aims 1.Key vocabulary: finishing line, award, marathon, Italian, turn, so far, champion, taekwondo, belt

2.Grammar : 一般過(guò)去時(shí)和一般將來(lái)時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài) ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Revision Review the text of Unit 2 Step 2 Language practice 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole class.2.Grammar : 小結(jié)一般過(guò)去時(shí)和一般將來(lái)時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài) Step 3 Work in pairs.1.Ask and answer the questions in Activity 1.2.Complete the passage with the correct form of the words in Activity 2.3.Look at the pictures and put them in the correct order in Activity 3.Step 4 Do exercises 1.Complete the conversation with the correct form of the words in the box in Activity 4.2.Choose the best answer in Activity 5.3.Listening:

1)Listen and check the true statements in Activity 6.2)Listen again and choose the correct answer in Activity 7.4.Put the sentences in the correct order to complete the conversation in Activity 8.Step 5 Around the world: The Paralympics Games Step 6 Module task: Module task: Making a class sports survey

1.Work in groups.Write questions to find out about the sport people like to watch and do.* What sports do you like?

* How often...?

* Do you like to...or...? 2.Carry out your survey.* Ask as many students as you can to answer your questions.3.Write the results of your survey.1)Say how many students you asked the questions were.We asked...student ―What...?‖

2)Compare their answers.… students said...and...students said...Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.10, 11, 12&13.Module 4 Great inventions

Unit 1 Paper and printing have been used for ages 教 學(xué) 目 標(biāo)

德育目標(biāo):To know something about the history of paper inventing 知識(shí)目標(biāo):To get information about the history of paper inventing from the conversation 能力目標(biāo):To talk about the advantages of some inventions To practise the passive voice of the future tense, perfect tense and modal verbs.重點(diǎn) Vocabulary advantage, battery , borrow , camera, charge lend look after, online, photo, promise, same, turn off, turn on 難點(diǎn)

the passive voice of the future tense, perfect tense, and modal verbs.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

課型

Listening and speaking 教法

PWP approach Teaching Procedures: Step one: Revision 1)Talk about some great invention, recall the words of inventions: TV, computer, watch, radios, camera, digital camera, photo, mobile phone, internet.Teach: online magazine 2)Recall what we have learned in the last Module Step two: Listening and vocabulary

1.Talking: What's the advantage of an online magazine 2.Listen and check the words

3.Listen and read ⑴ Play the tape to let the Students get the answer: Can the digital camera be borrowed from Tony's Dad

⑵Do Activity 4.Get the students to show their answers.⑶Listen and repeat.Notes:Everyday English Can I ask a favour 幫忙,賞光 Anyway?談點(diǎn)別的,另外 Here it is.給你,在這兒 It doesn't matter.沒(méi)關(guān)系

I'll see to that.我會(huì)處理的.Is that clear 清楚嗎 懂了嗎 Promise!我一定!language Points

1)Paper and printing have been used for ages.for ages----for(many)years好多年了.類(lèi)似短語(yǔ): for hours/ days/months 等.2)The battery hasn't been charged for a couple of months.a couple of---several 幾個(gè)

3)I'll see to it.我來(lái)處理.see to sb./ sth.= look after, deal with ”處理, 照顧, 關(guān)照“ 4.)You must promise that it won't be….promise to do/ that..= make a promise to do/that 答應(yīng), 許諾作某事 Promise!= I promise to do that.我答應(yīng)!5)turn on----打開(kāi) turn off----關(guān)閉 turn up-----開(kāi)大 turn down---關(guān)小

eg.Don't forget to ___________the light when you leave the room.Please ___________the TV, the football is beginning.Would you please ________it ______ a little I can't hear it clearly.The baby is sleeping.Please _____________ the radio a little.4.Read the summary of the conversation.Underline the wrong information 5.Answer the questions Ask Ss to say their answers and check them together.6.Find the sentences in the conversation which mean Grammar Points

Will(won't_)+ be +動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞為一般將來(lái)時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài) 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

have/has(not)been + 動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞為現(xiàn)在完成時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài) 情態(tài)動(dòng)詞+ be + 動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞為情態(tài)動(dòng)詞的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài) Summary: 各種時(shí)態(tài)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)構(gòu)成 一般現(xiàn)在時(shí):S+ am/is /are + done 一般過(guò)去時(shí):S+ was/were + done 一般將來(lái)時(shí):S+ will + be + done

情態(tài)動(dòng)詞:S+can/may/must/should+be+done 現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí): S+ am/ is/ are + being+ done 過(guò)去進(jìn)行時(shí): S+ was/were + being+ done 現(xiàn)在完成時(shí):S+ have/has + been+ done Pronunciation and Speaking Listen to the sentences and repeat.Homework: Finish work book 1-3 附加練習(xí): 中英互譯: I'll see to that._______________ 幫個(gè)忙________________ Promise.________________ 照相________________ look after________________ 好幾個(gè)________________ turn off________________ 幾年________________ Here it is.________________ 由?.代替________________ 改為被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)句子

1.They have published two issues of this magazine.2.Betty has kept my watch for two days.3.I'll charge the battery for your MP3 players.4.I could not find my bag anywhere.課題

Module 4 Great Inventions

Unit 2 Books could be produced more quickly and cheaply.教 學(xué) 目 標(biāo)

德育目標(biāo):To research science and love science 知識(shí)目標(biāo): To understand passages involving present perfect perfect tense 能力目標(biāo):To learn a reading skill-----Scanning To know the history about paper inventing 重點(diǎn)

Vocabulary Create, produce, ink, against, knowledge, spread, introduction, receive, 難點(diǎn)

Phrase:made of, at a time, by hand, at the beginning of, in a way, rather than, one day 課型

Reading and writing 教法

PWP approach Teaching Procedures: 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Step I: Revision Have/has been + done This book/ discuss/ on telephone It/ buy/by thousands of people Children/tell to read this book The book/ print/ again and again Other books /write /about this book Must/can/may be done 1.a)All students must read this book.b)This book _____________by all students.2.a)Everyone can understand his ideas.b)His ideas ________________by everyone.3.a)I could not fine her books anywhere.b)Her books ________________anywhere.4.a)For a long time, many people could not use computers.b)Computers__________________by many 5.a)We can do the work now if you want.b)The work _____________now if you want.6.a)You must not take these magazines from the library.b)These magazines _________________from the library.Reading and vocabulary 1.Talk in pairs What are the advantages of both book and computers Can books be replaced by computers

2.Read and get the main ideas of the paragraphs P1 c.Life on paper and in print P2 a.The world before books P3.b.The invention of printing P4.d.Technology and books

P5.e.Can books be replaced by computers Language Points

1.looks through 瀏覽,溫習(xí)2.with– without 帶有? / 沒(méi)有?

3.be made of----be made from---be made up of---be made in------be made by— be made into –--4.write words on--make a book--in those days--at a time--by hand---as a result----5.put? against 將?放進(jìn)/刻進(jìn) hold? against 將?貼到

6.at the beginning of 在?初/ 開(kāi)始時(shí) 7.after that 然后,之后 in a way 以?方式

8.compare?.with?.與?.相比 , 與?.相媲美

9.rather than 勝過(guò),而不愿 prefer to do? rather than do? 情愿?而不..be replaced by 被?.所替代 be read online 在網(wǎng)上閱讀

3.Make notes to complete the timeline.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

4.Answer the questions 1.Why were books expensive and rare before the invention of printing 2.Why did ideas spread more quickly when books became cheaper 3.What can we use instead of books to get information Homework

Finish the workbook exercises 課題

Module 4 Great Inventions Unit 3 Language practice 教學(xué)目標(biāo)

德育目標(biāo):To know about some great inventions 知識(shí)目標(biāo): To practice the use of passive voice 能力目標(biāo):To complete a task about ”How to improve inventions“ 重點(diǎn)

被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài): 情態(tài)動(dòng)詞的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài): 情態(tài)動(dòng)詞(not)+ be +過(guò)去分詞 現(xiàn)在完成時(shí)—— have/has +been+動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞 難點(diǎn)

情態(tài)動(dòng)詞的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài): 情態(tài)動(dòng)詞(not)+ be +過(guò)去分詞 現(xiàn)在完成時(shí)—— have/has +been+動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞 課型

Revision and application 教法

Formal and interactive practices Part I: Revision Language practice 現(xiàn)在完成時(shí)的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài): have/has(not)been +過(guò)去分詞 情態(tài)動(dòng)詞的被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài): 情態(tài)動(dòng)詞(not)+ be +過(guò)去分詞 Conclusion

被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的構(gòu)成:be +動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞

一般現(xiàn)在時(shí)—— am/is / are +動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞

一般過(guò)去時(shí)—— was/were +動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞

情態(tài)動(dòng)詞—— aux.v.(must/can/could/may?)+ be +動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞 現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)—— be(am,is,are)+being +動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞 一般將來(lái)時(shí)—— will be/be going to be +動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞 現(xiàn)在完成時(shí)—— have/has +been+動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去分詞 主動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)改成被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的步驟及注意事項(xiàng) 1.主動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的賓語(yǔ)改成被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的主語(yǔ).2.主動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的謂語(yǔ)動(dòng)詞改成被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)的謂語(yǔ)動(dòng)詞.do----be done 3.注意保持時(shí)態(tài)和人稱(chēng)的一致.4.帶雙賓的謂語(yǔ)動(dòng)詞有兩種改法.當(dāng)把直接賓語(yǔ)改成主語(yǔ)時(shí),謂語(yǔ)動(dòng)詞后必須加適當(dāng)?shù)慕樵~: to / for.如:give--be given to 此類(lèi)動(dòng)詞還有:pass show send?

再如:buy---be bought for此類(lèi)動(dòng)詞還有:make draw cook mend?

5.一些動(dòng)詞不定式在主動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)中省略to作賓語(yǔ)補(bǔ)足語(yǔ),改成被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)時(shí),to必須還原.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

注:1.不及物動(dòng)詞(vi.)不用被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài).如:happen,take place ,appear disappear?沒(méi)有被動(dòng)形式.**幾種特殊結(jié)構(gòu)

1.My uncle gave me a gift on my birthday.----I was given a gift on my birthday.A gift was given to me on my birthday.2.We often hear him play the guitar.He is often heard to play the guitar 注意:see, watch, hear, notice, feel, make, listen to, look at等動(dòng)詞/短語(yǔ)后作賓語(yǔ)補(bǔ)語(yǔ)的不定式都不帶to;但改成被動(dòng)語(yǔ)態(tài)后必須帶to.Part II: Language Practice Read though the sentences with the students and talk about the highlighted structures.Exercises: Activities 1~8 Finish the exx with the students according to the highlighted words of every activity.Check the answers.Homework: Finish off the workbook exercises

Module 5 Museums

The Teaching Plan for Unit1 You mustn't touch it!Topic You mustn't touch it!Type of lesson New lesson Period(s)Two

Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: To know something about the signs around you and obey the rules.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests and better attitude to learn English.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: To talk about the signs with ”mustn't, can't, Don't… No….“ And Word Formation--Compound words Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the signs Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

&

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: 1.The new words and phrases.2.The listening material of Activity 3.Special Strategies: 1.Give some time to the students to remember the new words.2.Talk something related with listening material before listening.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching

Procedure Step1: Greeting and revision have/has been + 過(guò)去分詞;情態(tài)動(dòng)詞+be+過(guò)去分詞 Step2: Talking: The signs around you(draw some pictures on the blackboard about sighs, ask students to guess)Step3: Listening and vocabulary 1.Match the pictures with the phrases 2.Listen and underline the correct word in each sentence 1)Read the words together and try to understand their meanings.2)Listen and check.3.Listen and read 1)Close the book and listen to the tape, then answer the question: What are they doing 2)Check the answer and listen again then finish part 5.3)Ask some students to check the answers.4)Listen and repeat.Language points: 1)look forward to 與pay attention to 中的to都是介詞,后面應(yīng)跟名詞,代詞或動(dòng)名詞,如: I'm looking forward to meeting you.You must pay attention to the spelling in your writing.2)Hang on a minute!等一下!3)on one's own 單獨(dú)的 4)take a photo 拍張照片

5)against 反對(duì) be against doing sth.反對(duì)做某事

6)幾種表示禁止的表達(dá)方式: Don't+動(dòng)詞原形 No+名詞/動(dòng)名詞 can't mustn't be not allowed to 7)No, you can't take a photo, either.Either在此用作副詞,要與否定詞連用,意思是”也不“.如, I don't like coffee either.我也不喜歡咖啡.Step 4: Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.2.Pairwork: Talk about the rules you can or can't do in libraries or museums.Homework 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Copy the new words and recite the useful phrases.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 完成句子.1.禁止喧嘩,它違反規(guī)定.No shouting!It's against the rules.2.好,讓我們下樓吧!Well, let's go downstairs.3.不要碰,禁止你碰它.Don't touch!You mustn't touch it.4.不,你也不能拍照.No, you can't take a photo, either.5.趕快!否則我們將遲到了.Hurry up, or we'll be late for school.Self-reflection The Teaching Plan for Unit2 There's no shouting and no running.Designed by: Yang Lijian Date: Sep.29 Topic Type of lesson New lesson Period(s)Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.To know something about the Science Museum in London.2.Useful important phrases.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests about the Science Museum.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To get information about the Science Museum in London.2.To understand passages involving Compound word.Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties &

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Phrases and Compound word.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the new words.Personal adjustment Teaching 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

procedure Teaching Procedure Step1 Revision

Use ”mustn't, can't, Don't No.“ to make more sentences about the rules for museums or libraries.(Tips: game or competition.)Step2 Reading and vocabulary 1.Read the words and talk about the pictures.2.Read the passage and answer the questions.3.Check the answers and listen to the tape.4.Complete the table and check 5.Language points: 1)allow doing sth.允許做某事.如, They don't allow smoking in the museum.他們不允許在博物館吸煙.allow sb.to do sth.允許某人做某事.如, My parents don't allow me to read in the bed.我父母不允許我躺在床上看書(shū).be allowed to do sth.被允許做某事.如, Students are not allowed to smoke.學(xué)生們不準(zhǔn)吸煙.2)work out 計(jì)算出 3)try out 檢驗(yàn),試用

4)fill?with? 用......填充......She filled the bottle with water.她用水裝滿(mǎn)了瓶子.區(qū)別:be filled with 表示”充滿(mǎn)“,強(qiáng)調(diào)動(dòng)作;be full of 表示”裝滿(mǎn),盛滿(mǎn)“,表示狀態(tài).Hs heart was filled with gratitude.他內(nèi)心充滿(mǎn)了感激之情.The basket was full of flowers.籃子里盛滿(mǎn)了花.5)compare?with 與......作比較

6)drop in 順便走訪,也可用于drop in on sb.順便走訪某人.7)Above all ”首先,最重要的是“ 8)as long as so/as+adj./adv.+as 像......一樣

Step 3 Writing Complete the passage then check the answers.Homework

Finish the workbook exercises.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 單項(xiàng)選擇.1.A: Hellow!Would you like to go to the cinema with me tonight B: I'm sorry, I can't.Father won't B me to go out in the evening.A.let B.allow C.offer D.help 2.We won't allow C n museum.But you are allowed _____ in the rest room.A.smoking;smoking B.smoke;smoking C.smoking;to smoke D.to smoke;to smoke 3.Be careful!The bowl C hot water.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

A.full of B.fill with C.is filled with D.is fulled of Self-reflection The Teaching Plan for Module5/Unit3 Language in use Topic Type of lesson Revision Period(s)Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.Master the key words and structure.2.To practice the use of Compound word.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: Talk about you can or can't do something Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To talk about the rules with ”mustn't, can't, Don't… No….“ Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard.Strategies for teaching difficulties &

key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Use the structure ”allow or not allow doing sth.“ To explain the rules.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the structures.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step 1: Revision 1.Finish part 1 and 2.2.Check the answers and read the sentences in language practice.3.Review:

1)No+v.-ing!如: No smoking!不許吸煙!No joking!不要開(kāi)玩笑!2)祈使句 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

否定的祈使句同樣可以用來(lái)表示”禁止“.如: Don't shout.不要喊叫.Don't make any noise.不要吵鬧.3)You mustn't…

情態(tài)動(dòng)詞mustn't 可以表達(dá)”禁止“的概念.如: You mustn't take photographs of the exhibits in museums.博物館中不得給展品拍照.You mustn't tell it to anyone.你決不可以告訴任何人.4)You can't…

can't 可以表示”能力“,”可能性“,也可以表示”不允許“.因此可以用來(lái)制止某人做某事.如: In most museums you can't make any noise.在大多數(shù)博物館里不能吵鬧.5)You aren't allowed to…

本句型用來(lái)制止對(duì)方做某事.如: You are not allowed to touch the exhibits.不要觸摸展品.Step 2 Finish the all exercises then check it.Step 3 Compound words(見(jiàn)書(shū)本P179)Exercises: Make new words using the words in Box A and Box B.A

bed class down home post up wet B card room site stairs work mate load sick Homework Finish off the workbook exercises Review the language points in this module.Blackboard Writing Design 1)No+v.-ing!2)祈使句

否定的祈使句同樣可以用來(lái)表示”禁止“.如: Don't shout.不要喊叫.3)You mustn't… 4)You can't…

can't 可以表示”能力“,”可能性“,也可以表示”不允許“.因此可以用來(lái)制止某人做某事.5)You aren't allowed to… Self-reflection

Module 6 Save our world 教案設(shè)計(jì) 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

一、教材內(nèi)容分析

本模塊以杜絕浪費(fèi)，保護(hù)環(huán)境，拯救地球?yàn)樵?huà)題，讓學(xué)生在了解地球危機(jī)重重的基礎(chǔ)上，通過(guò)活動(dòng)，考慮我們學(xué)生應(yīng)怎樣從生活細(xì)節(jié)中采取措施來(lái)保護(hù)環(huán)境，保護(hù)地球，進(jìn)而培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的憂(yōu)患意識(shí)和主人翁意識(shí)。討論話(huà)題源于周?chē)h(huán)境，貼近生活，便于開(kāi)展活動(dòng)。教學(xué)中應(yīng)結(jié)合學(xué)生實(shí)際情況，靈活調(diào)整教學(xué)內(nèi)容，合理設(shè)置課時(shí)。適當(dāng)進(jìn)行拓展，以豐富學(xué)生知識(shí)，拓展學(xué)生視野，進(jìn)行理想、人生責(zé)任的教育。

二、學(xué)情分析

通過(guò)兩年的學(xué)習(xí)，學(xué)生已能用英語(yǔ)熟練地表達(dá)自己的看法和意見(jiàn)。本模塊的話(huà)題是環(huán)境、資源，這是學(xué)生很熟悉也較感興趣的話(huà)題, 但同時(shí)對(duì)學(xué)生的知識(shí)儲(chǔ)備要求較高。首先要求學(xué)生通過(guò)多種途徑了解地球環(huán)境、資源的現(xiàn)狀。其次在教師預(yù)設(shè)的任務(wù)中，要使學(xué)生有話(huà)可說(shuō)，但是這個(gè)話(huà)題涉及較多的知識(shí)，學(xué)生掌握的難度較大, 如果材料處理不當(dāng)，會(huì)導(dǎo)致學(xué)生有話(huà)想說(shuō)，卻無(wú)法用英語(yǔ)表達(dá)的尷尬場(chǎng)面。因此在具體安排教學(xué)內(nèi)容時(shí)，可由簡(jiǎn)到難，適當(dāng)降低難度與要求，讓學(xué)生更好地運(yùn)用課本知識(shí)，達(dá)到提高綜合運(yùn)用語(yǔ)言能力的目的。

三、教學(xué)目標(biāo)

1.語(yǔ)言知識(shí)目標(biāo) 詞匯 waste、energy、pollution、recvcle、reusable、reduce、reuse、repair、environmental、hopeless、necessary、plastic、sort、harm、material 詞組句型 instead of、do harm to、make a difference to、It’s+adj+to、stop from 語(yǔ)法 前綴、后綴構(gòu)詞法 功能 話(huà)題 表達(dá)如何杜絕浪費(fèi)，保護(hù)環(huán)境，拯救地球

以了解地球危機(jī)重重為基礎(chǔ)，討論如何拯救地球?yàn)樵?huà)題

2．語(yǔ)言技能目標(biāo)

聽(tīng) 聽(tīng)懂有關(guān)不同保護(hù)環(huán)境方法的對(duì)話(huà)，提高學(xué)生實(shí)際應(yīng)用能力

說(shuō) 能用本模塊的生詞、短語(yǔ)開(kāi)展對(duì)話(huà)、討論，介紹各自生活中保護(hù)環(huán)境的方法

讀 了解地球環(huán)境的現(xiàn)狀, 通過(guò)閱讀掌握reduce，reuse，recycle的含義和重要性，進(jìn)行簡(jiǎn)單的閱讀技能訓(xùn)練

寫(xiě) 1．能用核心詞匯寫(xiě)出簡(jiǎn)短的、表達(dá)觀點(diǎn)的句子

2．能寫(xiě)出生存現(xiàn)狀和保護(hù)措施，形成完整的計(jì)劃性文章

演示與表達(dá) 能向全班做有關(guān)生存現(xiàn)狀和保護(hù)措施的發(fā)言與展示

3．學(xué)習(xí)策略目標(biāo)

通過(guò)合作討論、游戲、競(jìng)賽等多種活動(dòng)形式，實(shí)現(xiàn)在用中學(xué)，學(xué)而能用的原則。

認(rèn)知策略 調(diào)控策略 聯(lián)系，歸納，推測(cè)等技能。

從同伴處得到反饋，對(duì)自己在敘述及作文中的錯(cuò)誤進(jìn)行修改。

交際策略 學(xué)習(xí)運(yùn)用恰當(dāng)句子表達(dá)自己的觀點(diǎn)。資源策略 能利用多種途徑及學(xué)習(xí)資源查找信息，用所學(xué)內(nèi)容進(jìn)行真實(shí)交際。自學(xué)策略 能借助詞匯圖掌握單詞，形成話(huà)題聯(lián)想的習(xí)慣，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的閱讀能力技巧。合作學(xué)習(xí)策略 關(guān)心周?chē)纳娆F(xiàn)狀和保護(hù)措施, 交流并分享各自的觀點(diǎn)并形成最終觀點(diǎn)。

4．文化意識(shí)目標(biāo) 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

引導(dǎo)學(xué)生關(guān)注社會(huì)，關(guān)注身邊的事和人，關(guān)心周?chē)纳娆F(xiàn)狀和保護(hù)措施，對(duì)學(xué)生進(jìn)行環(huán)保意識(shí)的滲透。同時(shí)讓他們了解保護(hù)環(huán)境離我們很近，身邊有許多機(jī)會(huì)，進(jìn)而培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的憂(yōu)患意識(shí)和主人翁意識(shí)和關(guān)愛(ài)地球之心。

5．情感態(tài)度目標(biāo)

（1）通過(guò)開(kāi)展生動(dòng)活潑的教學(xué)活動(dòng)，激發(fā)學(xué)生的興趣。

（2）培養(yǎng)學(xué)生熱愛(ài)生活、熱愛(ài)自然界，培養(yǎng)保護(hù)環(huán)境的意識(shí)和關(guān)愛(ài)地球之心。同時(shí)也積極鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生參與社會(huì)實(shí)踐活動(dòng)。

（3）引導(dǎo)學(xué)生與他人合作，相互幫助，共同完成學(xué)習(xí)任務(wù)，盡情享受學(xué)習(xí)的樂(lè)趣。

四、重點(diǎn)難點(diǎn)

1.教學(xué)重點(diǎn)

重點(diǎn)話(huà)題：How to be green 2.教學(xué)難點(diǎn)

（1）前綴、后綴構(gòu)詞法及其積累

（2）能用恰當(dāng)?shù)氐赖挠⒄Z(yǔ)表達(dá)對(duì)保護(hù)環(huán)境的看法。3．突破途徑

以話(huà)題為核心，通過(guò)個(gè)人思考、小組及班級(jí)活動(dòng)等不同途徑，在聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、讀、寫(xiě)中使單詞及句型以不同的形式反復(fù)出現(xiàn)，在足夠的輸入中，達(dá)成有效的語(yǔ)言輸出。

五、教材處理

1、任務(wù)

核心任務(wù)：能夠運(yùn)用所學(xué)句型結(jié)構(gòu)向不同的朋友交流自己關(guān)于保護(hù)環(huán)境的看法。三個(gè)環(huán)節(jié)如下：

pre-task：學(xué)生通過(guò)多種途徑了解有關(guān)環(huán)保的知識(shí)，激活背景知識(shí)。

Task-cycle：通過(guò)整個(gè)模塊的聽(tīng)說(shuō)讀寫(xiě)的訓(xùn)練，強(qiáng)化“地球現(xiàn)狀和保護(hù)環(huán)境的途徑”的表達(dá)能力，為完成核心任務(wù)做好鋪墊。

post-task：達(dá)成任務(wù)，展示成果，自我評(píng)價(jià)，反饋學(xué)習(xí)情況。

2、課時(shí)安排

Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.Period Two: Unit 2 Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Period Three: Unit 3 Language in use(1)Period Four: Unit 3 Language in use(2)

六、教學(xué)設(shè)計(jì)

Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.Step 1: Warming-up According to the words, let the students say something about our world and describe it.設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 從學(xué)生所了解的世界入手，利用學(xué)生已有的認(rèn)知水平進(jìn)行頭腦風(fēng)暴，主要為下一步世界中最主要的環(huán)境問(wèn)題的引出做準(zhǔn)備工作。

Step 2: Lead-in 1.Watch a video about our world.2.Discuss: What problems did you see?

3.Work in pairs.Say what you should do about these problems.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

視頻讓學(xué)生更直觀地了解到我們的地球所面臨的日趨嚴(yán)重的環(huán)境問(wèn)題。通過(guò)觀看，思考和討論，給學(xué)生提供一個(gè)運(yùn)用英語(yǔ)的機(jī)會(huì)，培養(yǎng)了學(xué)生注意的能力和主題理解能力，更激發(fā)了學(xué)生保護(hù)環(huán)境的意識(shí)。Step 3: Listening

1.Look at the photos.Describe and check them.(Activities 1 and 2)

2.Listen and read.Then do Activties 6 and 7.3.Discuss: Look at Activity 5.Choose one of them and answer it.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

聽(tīng)力是學(xué)生的一個(gè)難關(guān)，因此在設(shè)計(jì)中應(yīng)由淺入深，教師加以引導(dǎo)和幫助?；顒?dòng)五在課文中沒(méi)有直接原文答案，為降低難度，可讓學(xué)生選擇回答，讓各層次的學(xué)生都有事情可做，都有事情會(huì)做，提高參與率和成就感。

Step 4: Speaking

1.Watch a video.2.Disuss: Think of some ways of environmental protection.Complete the table with the ways.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

保護(hù)環(huán)境并不只是政府的事情，其實(shí)在我們身邊有許多我們能做而常被忽視的。通過(guò)觀看同齡人的行為，讓學(xué)生了解我們不該做的很多，我們?cè)撟龅母?。讓學(xué)生考慮應(yīng)怎樣從生活細(xì)節(jié)中采取措施來(lái)保護(hù)環(huán)境，保護(hù)地球，進(jìn)而培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的憂(yōu)患意識(shí)和主人翁意識(shí)，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生熱愛(ài)生活、熱愛(ài)自然界，培養(yǎng)保護(hù)環(huán)境的意識(shí)和關(guān)愛(ài)地球之心。

Homework: 1.Review Unit One.2.Workbook: Page 133 Vocabulary and Listening.3.Choose one of the two and finish it.(1)Think of more ways of environmental protection.(2)Find out some problems around you and think how to solve them.Then write it down.Period Two: Unit Two Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Step 1: Warming-up

1.Check the homework.2.Introduce some environmental groups.3.Do a questionnaire.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

在社會(huì)中，包括政府在內(nèi)，有許多的機(jī)構(gòu)，單位，組織和個(gè)人都關(guān)心和保護(hù)著環(huán)境。通過(guò)問(wèn)卷讓學(xué)生領(lǐng)悟我們雖小，但我們可做的很多，而且這些可做的事就在我們的身邊，就在我們的日常生活里，從而為課文的引出做好鋪墊。

Step 2: Lead-in

Look at the pictures.Say which things are better for the environment and why.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

利用學(xué)生最熟悉的生活用品比較，在一定的語(yǔ)境中進(jìn)行討論和學(xué)習(xí)詞匯。小組討論可以集思廣益，加深對(duì)課文的理解。而進(jìn)行有意義的交流是詞匯學(xué)習(xí)的上上策，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生詞不離句學(xué)語(yǔ)言的好習(xí)慣。并且讓學(xué)生從自身的感受和生活的經(jīng)驗(yàn)來(lái)判斷, 激發(fā)學(xué)生熱愛(ài)生活、關(guān)心生活和保護(hù)環(huán)境的意識(shí)。三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Step 3: Reading

1.Read the passage.2.Work in pairs and answer the questions.(Activity 6)

3.Read the passage again and check the things you should do.Then give reasons for what you should or shouldn’t do.(Activities 4 and 5)設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

通過(guò)慢速和快速閱讀培養(yǎng)正確的閱讀方法，讓學(xué)生了解文章的主旨，同時(shí)培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的猜詞能力，提高閱讀能力。通過(guò)學(xué)生自己的閱讀，主動(dòng)去發(fā)現(xiàn)問(wèn)題，提出問(wèn)題，并通過(guò)不同途徑解決問(wèn)題。通過(guò)有意義的回答問(wèn)題這種說(shuō)的練習(xí)不但加深了對(duì)文章的理解，而且突出了語(yǔ)言的交流功能。

Step 4: Writing

1.Work in pairs.Make some lists of things.2.Make suggestions about how to be green.Give reasons，please.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

本部分為寫(xiě)作活動(dòng)，與學(xué)生們的學(xué)習(xí)密切相關(guān)，同時(shí)也鞏固先前的閱讀所學(xué)知識(shí)，具有一定的難度，因此有必要提供范文。

1.本活動(dòng)為寫(xiě)前活動(dòng)，目的是收集信息，讓學(xué)生深度理解三個(gè)重要詞匯。

2.本活動(dòng)是任務(wù)的主要階段，首先讓學(xué)生重溫根據(jù)先前的圖表信息，然后制定環(huán)保建議和理由。

Homework:

1.Review Unit Two.2.Workbook: Page 134 Reading and writing.3.Choose one of the two and finish it.(1)Make suggestions about how to be green and give reasons.(2)Make a list of things that you have done something to help our environment.Period Three: Unit three Language in use(1)Step 1: Warming-up

1.Check the homework.2.Watch a video.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

通過(guò)觀看視頻,讓學(xué)生了解本堂課的主題是利用我們所學(xué)到的知識(shí)去討論問(wèn)題，解決問(wèn)題。最重要的是如何從身邊的小事開(kāi)始，從我做起去保護(hù)環(huán)境，愛(ài)護(hù)環(huán)境，以達(dá)到學(xué)習(xí)和生活緊密聯(lián)系。Step 2: Practice

1.Complete the conversation with the correct form of the phrases in the box.(Activity 9)

2.Read the ideas on protecting the environment.Then practise and answer the questions.(Activities 6 and 7)

3.Work in pairs.Discuss the question.(Activity 8)設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

練習(xí)經(jīng)過(guò)重組，難度有簡(jiǎn)到難，逐步深入，讓學(xué)生自然地接受，消化。練習(xí)8又為下一步的討論打下基礎(chǔ)。三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Step 3: Discuss

Work in pairs and talk about the picture.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

學(xué)生通過(guò)任務(wù)，分享各自的智慧火花，使口語(yǔ)能力得到提高。通過(guò)交流看法，多角度、多元化促進(jìn)學(xué)生對(duì)知識(shí)的掌握和運(yùn)用。從聽(tīng)、說(shuō)逐漸過(guò)渡到下一步的寫(xiě)，由口頭輸出的流暢性過(guò)渡到筆頭輸出的精確性。

Step 4: Module task

1.Discuss what you can do about pollution.(1)Decide what type of pollution you want to talk about.It could be water pollutiong, air pollution, waste, cutting down forests, etc.(2)Discuss your topic.Say what you think about the problem and what can be done.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

本部分為寫(xiě)作活動(dòng)，可以鞏固先前的閱讀所學(xué)知識(shí)。本環(huán)節(jié)分為兩個(gè)步驟：第一步是挑選內(nèi)容，第二步是討論和語(yǔ)篇寫(xiě)作。第一步對(duì)于英語(yǔ)基礎(chǔ)不好的學(xué)生尤為有用。要求學(xué)生獨(dú)立寫(xiě)作，同時(shí)又將學(xué)生自主學(xué)習(xí)與小組合作活動(dòng)相結(jié)合，旨在培養(yǎng)學(xué)生獨(dú)立自主的學(xué)習(xí)能力及分享觀點(diǎn)，相互協(xié)作的能力。

2.Make a poster to tell others to protect the environment.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

活動(dòng)過(guò)程可讓學(xué)生先看一些例子，然后選擇一個(gè)話(huà)題，收集相關(guān)資料；為招貼畫(huà)選擇一個(gè)標(biāo)題；對(duì)招貼畫(huà)進(jìn)行描述介紹；進(jìn)行評(píng)比打分，選擇優(yōu)秀作品在班級(jí)報(bào)欄展示。該活動(dòng)有助于培養(yǎng)學(xué)生資料收集、篩選的能力，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生的主題意識(shí)和話(huà)題意識(shí)，以及小組成員的合作意識(shí)。讓學(xué)生明白不光自己要有環(huán)保意識(shí)，更要號(hào)召、呼吁身邊的人一起愛(ài)護(hù)環(huán)境，保護(hù)環(huán)境。

Homework:

1.Review Language in use(1).2.Finish the module task.Period Four: Unit three Language in use(2)Step 1: Word games

1.Make new words.According as the word, make new words as many as you can.2.Make new words.Join the words in Box A with the parts of words in Box B.Step 2: Practice

1.Do Activities 2, 3 and 4.2.Workbook: Grammar and vocabulary.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:

加前、后綴是英語(yǔ)中最常見(jiàn)的擴(kuò)充詞匯的方式，也是學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)必須掌握的構(gòu)詞法。但常用的前綴、后綴非常多，因此應(yīng)指導(dǎo)學(xué)生在學(xué)習(xí)的過(guò)程中自己學(xué)習(xí)，討論，研究和發(fā)現(xiàn)其規(guī)律，并注意平時(shí)的積累。

Homework:

1.Review Language in use(2).2.Finish the module work.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Module 7 Australia教學(xué)設(shè)計(jì)

Unit 1 I’m looking for the photos that you took in Australia!

Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: crocodile, shark, hand, have a look at, alongside, detail Key structure: The attributive clause with that

2.Listening skill: To understand conversations involving the Attributive Clause in listening.Improve the students’ listening ability.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Lead in Divide the class into several groups and each group has two, three or more students.One student acts as a travel agent, the other students want to travel.The agent will recommend some cities or countries to the others.設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 復(fù)習(xí)七八年級(jí)所學(xué)過(guò)的關(guān)于城市和國(guó)家的知識(shí)，自然的過(guò)渡到本單元的關(guān)于澳大利亞的重點(diǎn)對(duì)話(huà)。并且可以培養(yǎng)同學(xué)之間的合作與交流，提高會(huì)話(huà)能力。

Step 2 Presentation Show students a picture of Sydney Opera House and tell them ―Tony’s father has been to Australia.He visited Sydney Opera House.‖ Then get them to listen to the dialogue and answer two questions: 1.Where else did he visit? 2.What animals did he see? 設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 因?yàn)槭且黄^長(zhǎng)的對(duì)話(huà)，所以讓同學(xué)們帶著問(wèn)題去聽(tīng)，第一遍不要求逐字逐句聽(tīng)懂，但要能回答出簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)題。Step 3 Read and repeat Get the class to read the dialogue.Then ask them to read in pairs.Step 4 Complete the table After the students are familiar to the dialogue, ask them to complete the table in Activity 4.設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 在這一步驟中,讓學(xué)生從說(shuō)轉(zhuǎn)移到寫(xiě)上,并且讓同學(xué)們?cè)谕瓿杀砀竦耐瑫r(shí)更加熟悉課文。

Step 5 Answer questions Get students to answer questions about the dialogue.Step 6 Grammar Show students several sentences involving The Attributive Clause in this unit.Ask them to think of the use of the word ―that‖.設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 在本單元只是呈現(xiàn)一下定語(yǔ)從句的概念，讓同學(xué)們對(duì)此有一個(gè)印象，而不必強(qiáng)調(diào)如何去改寫(xiě)定語(yǔ)從句。在以后的兩個(gè)單元的逐步練習(xí)中再讓同學(xué)們慢慢地對(duì)此語(yǔ)法熟悉起來(lái)。

Step 7 Homework

1.Read the words and the dialogue frequently.Try to recite part of the dialogue.2.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.Unit 2 The camel that I rode had a bad temper.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: grape, ham, lamb, outback, relative, sheep, spir, surfing, wine, helicopter, purple, similar, ours, cricket, rugby, sunshine, expression, mate, temper, lifestyle Key structure: 1.The restrictive attributive clause with that 2.Reading skill: The students can read the long passage and can write some notes about it.Improve the students’ reading ability.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Play a game Get the whole class to play a game called ―I describe, you guess‖.設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 由游戲開(kāi)始上課,同學(xué)們會(huì)比較感興趣，尤其是九年級(jí)的同學(xué)。通過(guò)游戲的形式讓同學(xué)們能夠較輕松地讀懂并理解帶定語(yǔ)從句的句子。因?yàn)槔蠋煶龅念}目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若時(shí)間允許，還可以分小組做。

Step 2 Read and check Get the students to read the passage once or twice quickly, and after that ask them to find the information about some numbers.Then check the true sentences.設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 第二單元編排了一篇長(zhǎng)課文，教師可以把它當(dāng)成閱讀課來(lái)上。所以先讓同學(xué)們快速閱讀，然后找出一些關(guān)鍵句，并能夠判斷句子的正誤。能夠做到以上兩點(diǎn)就可以了。Step 3 Read again and write notes.Get the class to read the passage again, but this time read it more slowly.Then ask them to take some notes for Tony.The students can finish this job individually or they can discuss with their partners.設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 通過(guò)做筆記，能夠使同學(xué)們加深對(duì)課文的理解，并且加強(qiáng)同學(xué)們的歸納理解能力。Step 4 Read and repeat After the students are familiar to the passage, ask them to read the passage after the tape.Then they can read by themselves.Step 5 Explain some useful expressions.The teacher explains some useful expressions and grammar points.Step6 Homework

1.Read the words and the passage frequently.2.Copy the words and expressions.3.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.Unit 3 Language in use

Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: water sports, grey, ancestor Speaking skill: To say sentences involving the attributive clause.Writing skill: To write sentences involving the attributive clause.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Step 1 Play a game Play another ―I describe, you guess.‖

設(shè)計(jì)意圖: 本單元是一個(gè)復(fù)習(xí)單元,以游戲引出話(huà)題，活躍課堂氣氛，鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生大膽表達(dá)。因?yàn)槔蠋煶龅念}目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若時(shí)間允許，還可以分小組做。（讓同學(xué)們事先準(zhǔn)備好圖片）。在做這個(gè)游戲時(shí)，同學(xué)們能夠很輕松地說(shuō)出帶定語(yǔ)從句的句子，能夠在游戲當(dāng)中掌握好本單元的語(yǔ)法重點(diǎn)。Step 2 Read a dialogue Read a dialogue completed by the teacher and ask the students to make similar dialogues.Try to use the Attributive Clause.Read the conversation and pay attention to the underlined words.A: Do you want to see my photos? B: what photos? A: The photos that I took in Australia.1.A: What surprised you most in Australia?

B: The thing that surprised me most was the weather!2.A: What do you call that famous Australian animal? The one that can jump very high.B: Oh, you mean a kangaroo.3.A: What’s the name of that dangerous animal?

B: The one that is green? That’s a crocodile.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:本單元是復(fù)習(xí)單元，盡可能讓同學(xué)們運(yùn)用本單元所學(xué)過(guò)的知識(shí)來(lái)自己編對(duì)話(huà)，做到靈活運(yùn)用，大膽創(chuàng)新，并且還有助于合作與交流。

Step 3 Join the sentences.Ask the students to join the sentences with “that”.(句子見(jiàn)幻燈片)

Step 4 Finish Activity 1 Read the passage and underline all ― that‖ in the Attributive Clause.設(shè)計(jì)意圖:在第三和第四步中，著重點(diǎn)在寫(xiě)上。經(jīng)過(guò)了前面兩個(gè)單元的學(xué)習(xí)，本單元的重點(diǎn)是讓同學(xué)們能夠?qū)懗鰩ФㄕZ(yǔ)從句的句子，這也是本模塊的一個(gè)任務(wù)。Step 5 Around the world Show students a picture of Australian athlete and hero.Ask students to learn from her.Step 6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook.Module 8 Photos Teaching Plan

一、題材內(nèi)容

本模塊以“攝影”為話(huà)題，借此讓學(xué)生描述自己最理想的攝影作品。通過(guò)本模塊的學(xué)習(xí)，學(xué)生進(jìn)一步學(xué)習(xí)定語(yǔ)從句的用法。為學(xué)生提供了充足的語(yǔ)言實(shí)際運(yùn)用的機(jī)會(huì)。學(xué)生可以圍繞這一話(huà)題進(jìn)行大量的聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、讀、寫(xiě)方面的語(yǔ)言實(shí)踐活動(dòng),促使學(xué)生更有意識(shí)地自覺(jué)學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)。語(yǔ)法難點(diǎn)仍是定語(yǔ)從句。教學(xué)中教師應(yīng)隨時(shí)隨地靈活利用各種素材組織教學(xué)過(guò)程和內(nèi)容，充分調(diào)動(dòng)學(xué)生的積極性。教學(xué)目標(biāo)： 1)語(yǔ)言知識(shí)： 語(yǔ)音 能夠準(zhǔn)確掌握句子中的單詞重讀。三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

詞匯 trouble,shot,kid,expect,historic,size,beauty,category,movement,feature,include,rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, frightened 詞組 on the left/right, pick up, even though 語(yǔ)法 功能 能使用who, which 引導(dǎo)的定語(yǔ)從句。Measuring;Describing people and things.話(huà)題 以“攝影”為話(huà)題。2)語(yǔ)言技能：

聽(tīng) Identifying photos from descriptions.說(shuō) Describing photos.讀 Transferring information to a table.寫(xiě) Writing a description of a photograph.演示與表達(dá) 能夠向他人介紹自己的攝影作品。

3)學(xué)習(xí)策略

學(xué)習(xí)一定程度形成自主學(xué)習(xí)，有效交際、信息處理、英語(yǔ)思維能力。認(rèn)知 聯(lián)系，歸納，推測(cè)等技能。學(xué)習(xí)查詞典,閱讀報(bào)刊,上網(wǎng)等提高自學(xué)能力。調(diào)控 從同伴處得到反饋，對(duì)自己在敘述及作文中的錯(cuò)誤進(jìn)行修改。交際 資源 學(xué)習(xí)運(yùn)用恰當(dāng)詞語(yǔ)介紹自己的攝影作品。

通過(guò)報(bào)刊、書(shū)籍、網(wǎng)絡(luò)等其他資源獲取更多簡(jiǎn)單英語(yǔ)的有關(guān)攝影的信息。

自學(xué)策略 能夠根據(jù)自己的情況預(yù)習(xí)教材并進(jìn)行拓展。合作學(xué)習(xí)策略 能夠根據(jù)小組內(nèi)同學(xué)的特長(zhǎng)分工合作，積極參與討論，互相學(xué)習(xí)，取長(zhǎng)補(bǔ)短，注意從他人的演示中汲取經(jīng)驗(yàn),注意學(xué)習(xí)策略共享。

4)文化意識(shí)：樂(lè)于了解世界各地人們審美觀念。

5)情感態(tài)度：培養(yǎng)學(xué)生互助合作的情感素質(zhì)。參加各種英語(yǔ)活動(dòng),感受學(xué)習(xí)的樂(lè)趣，克服困難，在新環(huán)境中進(jìn)一步樹(shù)立準(zhǔn)確的語(yǔ)言學(xué)習(xí)觀，通過(guò)欣賞他人的攝影作品，提高自己的審美情趣。

6)任務(wù):能夠描述自己的攝影作品。

教學(xué)重點(diǎn)和難點(diǎn)：

重點(diǎn)：1．通過(guò)談?wù)撟约旱臄z影作品，訓(xùn)練學(xué)生的聽(tīng)、說(shuō)、讀、寫(xiě)能力； 2.who,which引導(dǎo)的定語(yǔ)從句。

難點(diǎn)： 掌握使用who,which引導(dǎo)的定語(yǔ)從句。

教學(xué)方法：

基于課程改革的理念及“第二語(yǔ)言習(xí)得論”,培養(yǎng)實(shí)現(xiàn)人的可持續(xù)發(fā)展和人的主體精神的自我完善和發(fā)展所必需的能力和素質(zhì)，運(yùn)用任務(wù)型教學(xué)途徑，圍繞核心任務(wù)，設(shè)定小任務(wù)，開(kāi)展和諧愉悅的課堂活動(dòng)，強(qiáng)調(diào)興趣第一的原則,初步設(shè)計(jì)“P—T—P”自主學(xué)習(xí)立體模式：pre-task?task-cycle?post-task。

二、教材處理

核心任務(wù)：能夠收集、拍攝自己最喜歡的作品，并能運(yùn)用所學(xué)句型結(jié)構(gòu)談?wù)撍麄儭Ｈ齻€(gè)環(huán)節(jié)如下：

pre-task：學(xué)生聯(lián)系生活實(shí)際，激活背景知識(shí)。

task –cycle：通過(guò)整個(gè)模塊的聽(tīng)說(shuō)讀寫(xiě)的訓(xùn)練，強(qiáng)化使用who,which引導(dǎo)的定語(yǔ)從句來(lái)談?wù)摂z影作品的表達(dá)能力，為完成任務(wù)做好鋪墊。post-task：達(dá)成任務(wù)，展示成果，反饋學(xué)習(xí)情況

三、教材安排

根據(jù)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的特點(diǎn)和規(guī)律，我們把本模塊劃分為4課時(shí)： 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking Period 2: Reading

Period 3: Writing& Around the world &Module Task Period 4: Language in use 注：教學(xué)時(shí)應(yīng)根據(jù)學(xué)生的學(xué)習(xí)水平、生活實(shí)際水平、接受程度及課堂出現(xiàn)的臨時(shí)狀況進(jìn)行運(yùn)用、調(diào)整及篩選。『教學(xué)設(shè)計(jì)』

Title:

Module 8 Photos

Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking 1.Teaching Aims and Demands:

1)Key vocabulary: trouble,shot,kid,expect, on the left/right, pick up, 2)Listening skill: To understand conversations involving talking about photos.Improve the students’ listening ability.3)Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know something about the Blues band, and practise making dialogue about photos.3.Teaching approach: Communicative teaching

4.Learning strategies: Bottom –up approach and listening to the tape and do some exercises.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP, Blackboard)6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision

Task 1: Recall what we have learned in Module 7.1.Label the pictures with the words and expressions.(1).Read through the words and expressions in the box and have the Ss.Repeat them after you.(2).Ask them to label them in the pictures on the screen.(3).List some words which are connected with Australia.Ask students to speak out as many as they can.2.Tell something about Australia.Ask students to speak out as much as they can.Step 2 Lead in

Task 2: Show some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, and lead in the topic of photos.Then learn the new words of this unit.1.Get them to enjoy some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, 2.Show them a picture of a concert.Let Ss guess what it is and what’s happing in this photo, then introduce the new words.3.Discuss the picture, using the words in the box in Activity 1.Step 3 Listen and read Task 3: Listen to the tape and finish Activity 2.Then check and call back the answers.1.Play the recording while they just listen and focus on the words in Activity 1.2.Have them check their answer with a partner and play the recording again.3.Check and call back the answer from the whole class.Task 4: Listen to the tape again and do Activity 4,5.Then check and call back the answers.1 Show them the questions in Activity 4.2.Play the recording and have them listen to the recording and focus on the questions in Activity 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

4.3.Play the recording again and have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.4.Then call back the answers from the whole class.5.Read the conversations in Activity 3.Make sure that Ss understand the conversation.6.Complete the sentences in their own words Activity 5.Then call back the answers from the whole class.Task 5: Let the Ss finish the Activity 6 by themselves.Then check and call back the answers.1.Show them the questions in Activity 6.2.Have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.3.Then check and call back the answers from the whole class.Task 6: Read 1.Play the recording again and pause after each phrase, asking the Ss.to repeat chorally and individually.2.Put the Ss.into groups of 5 to practise the dialogue.3.They should repeat it several times, changing the roles each time.Step 4 Pronunciation

Task7: Listen and repeat the sentences in Activity7 on page 65.Make sure that they stress the underlined words.1.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat the sentences.2.Play the recording again.Ask the Ss to pay particular attention to the word stress.3.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat chorally and individually.Step 5 Speaking

Task 8: Work in pairs, choose a photo to talk about and finish Activity 8.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get each of them to choose a photo.2.Ask them to work in pairs to share their descriptions.3.Call back some examples in a whole-class setting, paying special attention to the use of the attributive clause guided by who which..Step 6 Homework

1.Do Exx7.8&9 in the Wb.2.Oral work: Read the conversation of Activity 3.3.Preview Unit2 in Module 8.Period 2 : Reading 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)Language knowledge: historic, size, beauty, category, movement, feature, include, rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, photographer, present, ceremony，even though 2)Reading skills: To detect and foster the students’ reading skills To get information from the reading material.3)Emotion &Attitudes: To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points: To let the students know something about photo competition

and learn something about the differences among entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

3.Learning strategies: Communicative approach.4.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(Tape recorder, OHP)5.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1:Help students to revise what was learnt in Period1of this module.1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.2.Have the Ss.talk about them.Step 2 Preparation Task2: Let the Ss preview the new words and make them build the conception of entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos, then lead in the Activity 1.1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.2.Have the Ss.talk about them.Task 3: Learn the new words, then label the pictures with the words.1.Read through the words on the screen.Have the Ss.Repeat them after you.2.Read the words separately and have them remember them.3.Make some sentences with the words.4.Call back the answers from the whole class Step 3 Scanning and Skimming Task 4: Scan this passage, according to the content , finish Activity 3.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the passage as quickly as possible.2.Do Activity 3.Complete the table and write notes 3.Call back the answers from the whole class.Step 4 Reading Task5: Let the Ss read the passage by themselves in details, and do Activity 4.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the sentences in Activity 4.2.Read the passage by themselves.And ask to finish the true or false exercises.3.Check the answers with the whole class.Task6: Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, and finish Activity 5.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to listen and repeat the passage simultaneously.2.Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, 3.Get the students to correct the sentences..4.Call back the answers from the whole class.5.Language points in the passage.Task7: Finish Activity 6, Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the passage together loudly.2.Discuss the following questions in groups.1)―…read on to find out who the winners are.‖ where do you find who the winners are?

2)―…the fun which their fans are having.‖ Why are the fans having fun?

3)―It successfully shows the rich culture which makes Beijing so famous..‖ Who or what shows the rich culture? 3.Share the ideas.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Step 5 Pairwork Task6:Finish Activity 7.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the table.2.Work in pairs.Ask and answer about the places.3.Get Ss to talk about the classroom.Step 6 Practice 1.Do Exercise 10 on page 142 in the WB.2.Give the students some time to recall what they’ve learned in this class.Step 7 Homework 1.Read the text.2.Retell the text.Period 3: Writing & Around the world &Module Task 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)Writing skill: To write something about a photo.Improve the students’ writing ability.2)Reading skills: To get information from the reading material A famous photo.3)Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Learning strategies:Top-down and Interactive approach and do some exercises.3.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(Tape recorder, OHP)4.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1: Help students to revise what was learnt in the last class.1.Revise the words and phrases.2.Let the Ss.retell the text.Step 2 Writing.Task2: Write sentences about their favorite photograph.1.Ask the Ss run through the questions in Activity 8 on Page67 and w rite sentences about their favorite photograph..2.Call back the answers from the whole class, having individuals read their sentences.Task3: Write a short passage describing their favorite photograph 1.Ask the Ss to do this individually.2.They can exchange it with a partner for peer correction.3.Have some students read their passage out to the whole class.Step 3 Around the world Task4: Learn something about a famous photo.1.Ask the Ss.to look at the photo about the space.Tell the Ss.some knowledge about it.2.Read the text and answer any questions the Ss have.Step 4 Module Task Task5: Making a photo show.1.Activity 10 on page 71.Ask the Ss.to write about their favorite photo, saying what /who it is and why it is important to them.2.Activity 11 on page 71.Show their photo to their group.And tell others why they like it and why it is important to them..Answer any questions their group may have.Listen to the other 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

members of their group talk about their photos.3.Activity12 on page 71.Put all the photos on the table and talk about them in groups.Step4 Recalling Recall what we have learned today.Step5 Homework 1.Do Ex.11 on page 143.2.Do the Self-assessment on page 143.Period 4: Language in use

1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)To detect and foster the students’ understanding of grammar skills(skill)2)To master the useful words and expressions(knowledge)3)To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different

photos(emotion)2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know how to use ―Which and Who ‖ to make attributive clause

3.Teaching approach: Communicative teaching

4.Learning strategies: Formal instruction and task-based approach and interactive practice.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(recorder, OHP)6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Help students to revise what is learnt in 3 periods of this module.Step 2 Listen and speak Task1:Look at the photos in Activity 8,then discuss them.1.Get Ss.to describe cameras in the photos.2.Say how you think cameras have changed since their earliest beginnings.Task2: Practise listening 1.Ask the Ss.to listen to the conversation and do Activity 9 on page 70 individually.2.Listen again and check with their partners.3.Call the answers back from the class.Step 2 Write Task 3: Complete the passage using the correct form of the words and expressions in the box.1.Ask the Ss.to complete the passage using the correct form of the words and expressions in the box in Activity 1 and Activity 7.2.Call the answers back from some students.Step 3 Language practice Task4: To summarize and consolidate the attributive clause guided by who/which.1..Read through the examples with the Ss.and make sure that they are familiar with the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.2.Ask the Ss.to repeat the sentences in the box.3.Ask―Can you make other similar examples?‖

4.Focus the Ss’ attention on the ways in which they are used: who/which.Task5: Do Activity2 and Activity 3 on page 68 individually.1.Ask the Ss.to check with a partner.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

2..Ask the Ss.to read out the sentences.3.Summarize the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.Task 6: Join the sentences with who or which.1.Ask the Ss.to do Activity 4 on page 69 individually.2.Call the answers back from some students.Task7: Use the knowledge of this module to make an instruction of Activity 5.1.talk about the two pictures.2.Then talk about the people in the two pictures.3.Now ask questions about the picture, and write down their answers.Step 4 Guess Task8: A guessing game

1.Look around the class and describe something to their partner, using the knowledge of this module.2.Guess who/what I am describing.Step 5 Homework:

1.Finish all the exercises in the WB.2.Preview Module 9.The Teaching Plan for Module 9 Cartoon stories Unit 1 We need someone like superman who can save Tony.Type of lesson Listening and speaking Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:

To understand the conversation involving the use of the restrictive attributive clause;Emotional experience: To be able to retell Tony's experience and what his classmates did when Tony was in trouble.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students' listening and reading skills.2.To train students' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: To ask and give information about one's favourite cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties & 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.The new words and phrases.ending, flash, laughing, over there, word, have a word with 2.Master the structure of restrictive attributive clause with that, Which and who.1.Remember the new words of this unit.2.do some exercises by using them,and make more sentences.Teaching procedure Step1 Greeting and revision Say hello to everyone.Revise the grammar by doing some exercises The boys _______are playing football are from Class One.Football is a game _______is liked by most boys.The school in _______he once studied is very famouse.We bought a book ________had lots of cartoons in it.Step2 Presentation 1).Remember the words in the box of activity 1(with time limit--30s)2).Complete the sentences with words what you have remembered A _______________is a person who plays a part in a story, and the _______is the person who plays the main part.A ___________cartoon is one which doesn't make you ________, such as a ____________of a news story.A cartoon in which the hero saves someone is a story with a happy___________.A ________is a story you tell to make people laugh.Step 3 Listen and read.1.Listen to the tape carefully.2.Ask and answer in activity 4 1).What does Betty think the ending will be 2).Why is the situation no laughing matter 3).How do you think Superman can save Tony

4).When will Tony possibly find out that his friends have got the camera 5).Why does Betty says she'll be Superman 3.Explain the language points 1)This is serious.這是很?chē)?yán)肅的.2)But it's no laughing matter.但這不是開(kāi)玩笑的事情.3)to have a word with 和某人說(shuō)句話(huà) 4)That's good news.那是好消息.5)Here you are.給你.6)in deep trouble 處于險(xiǎn)境中

7)Oh dear!噢, 天啊!dear adj.①親愛(ài)的, e.g.Dear Sir./ My dear.②昂貴的(expensive)eg.That's a dear shop.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

③int.(表示傷心,焦急, 驚奇等)呵!哎呀 eg.Oh dear!serious(adj.)嚴(yán)肅的,認(rèn)真的---seriously(adv.)eg.Are you kidding or are you serious 你是開(kāi)玩笑還是認(rèn)真的Grandma is seriously ill.祖母病的很重.4.Translation the whole conversation by students.5.Work in pairs to complete the sentences in activity 5 in your own words.Step4.Pronunciation and speaking Listen and repeat the sentences.Step5.Homework Do the WB activity 1.Learn the conversation by heart.Blackboard Writing Design 1.But it's no laughing matter.但這不是什么可笑的事情.2.Have a word with sb.和某人說(shuō)句話(huà).比較:Have words with sb.與某人吵架.3.That's a smart idea!等于that's a good idea.4.Be in deep trouble.處于大麻煩/險(xiǎn)境中.Self-reflection

Unit 2

There are several fan clubs in China which have held birthday parties for Tintin.Type of lesson Reading and writing Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:

1.To get information from the reading material about cartoon stories.2.To learn some new vocabulary.Emotional experience: To learn more expressions of describing cartoon stories.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students' listening and reading skills.2.To train students' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: 1.To know more about many cartoon of China and abroad;2.To write about a cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.To understand the passage, 2.To learn the restrictive attributive clause with that, who and which 1.To get the main idea of each paragraph.2.Find out the restrictive attributive clause in the passage and explain them.Teaching procedure Step1 Warming-up

1.Review the text of Unit 1

2.Let the students act out the dialogue in pairs.3.Introduce the new words.Step 2: Reading 1.Talk about the following questions by groups.1).Do you like watching cartoons

2).What cartoons have you ever watched

3).Do you know the names of the following cartoon characters 4).Are they in recent cartoons or old cartoons

5).Use the words in the box to describe the cartoon characters.2.Listen to the passage to find out and check your answers.Name of cartoon Recent/Old Description Nemo Shrek the Monkey King Tintin Snoopy 3.Read the passage and find out the sentence which best summarizes the passage in activity 4.4.Listen to the passage again and choose the correct answer.1).The Monkey King is a cartoon character which_______.a)causes problems in heaven b)has travelled to the moon 2).Shrek is a monster who__________.a)falls in love with a princess b)was born from stone 3).Nemo is the name of a _________.a)fish which is caught by a diver b)big, fat cat which is very lazy 4).Snoopy is a lovable dog which was created by____.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

a)Tintin

b)Charles Brown's 5.Work in pairs and answer the questions in activity5.Step 3.Key words and expressions 1.favourite n.喜歡的東西/人 adj.特別喜歡的 2.series n.系列(單復(fù)同形)3.translate v.翻譯 translation n.翻譯, 轉(zhuǎn)化 translator n.翻譯者 4.Belgian n.比利時(shí)人 adj.比利時(shí)人的 Belgium n.比利時(shí) 5.create v.創(chuàng)造

creation n.創(chuàng)造

creative adj.有創(chuàng)造力的

6.orange-and-white 橘白相間的 black-and-white 黑白相間的

如果用表同一方面情況(如說(shuō)明性質(zhì),顏色,物質(zhì))的兩個(gè)或兩個(gè)以上的形容詞來(lái)作定語(yǔ)需用and連接.7.ever since 從?開(kāi)始

從他退休以來(lái),已經(jīng)在這呆五年了.He has been here for 5 years, ever since he retired.8.But it is above all the jokes played by the monkey that people remember.it 引導(dǎo)的強(qiáng)調(diào)句用來(lái)對(duì)句中某一成分加以強(qiáng)調(diào).結(jié)構(gòu):”It is(或was)+強(qiáng)調(diào)部分+ that(或who)? Step 4.Homework 1.Writing: try to write a cartoon by yourself.2.Complete the activities 5~8 on P145(WB)Blackboard Writing Design 1.fan club 影迷俱樂(lè)部

2.orange-and-white 橙白相間的 black-and-white 黑白相間的 合成詞作定語(yǔ) 3.win the heart of sb.贏得某人的心

4.in heaven 在天宮里

5.mke a mess 搞得亂七八糟 see a mess 看到狼籍一片 ?? Self-reflection

Unit 3 Langugage in use Type of lesson Revision and application Period 2 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Teaching Aims Language goals: To summarize and consolidate the language knowledge in this module.Emotional experience: To learn something about cartoons, to complete a task involving making a cartoon story Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Review the passive voices that students' have learned.2.To train students' ability of words and speaking.Realization of culture: Learn how to describe cartoon heroes, how to make a cartoon.Teaching aid Formal and interactive practice, task-based activities Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment To train students' ability of words and speaking.To be able to help each other in communication.Exercise method.Writing and Oral practicing method.Teaching

procedure Step 1.Greeting and revision 1.Review the text of Unit 2 2.Complete the sentences with which, who or that.1)The man_______we met was a cartoonist.2)He drew a dog___________had six legs.3)The cartoon and the cartoonist _________you're talking about is very famous.4)I know a teacher_______________is also a cartoonist.5)The picture____________I like best is the first one.6)Did the children watch a cartoon____________was drawn by Alice last Friday 3.Join the sentences with who, which or that.There's a Chinese artist.You must meet him.There's a Chinese artist(who)you must meet.Step 2 Language practice 1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole class.2.Ask them what language point is demonstrated.Attributive Clauses(引導(dǎo)詞的省略)Step4.Vocabulary 三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

1).Complete the passage with the correct words in activity 8.2).Complete the passage with the correct phrases in the box in activity 9.Step5.Grammar 1.Attributive Clauses

The cartoons(which / that)I like have lots of jokes.在英語(yǔ)中,如果定語(yǔ)從句的引導(dǎo)詞在從句中作賓語(yǔ)就可以省略,無(wú)論從句修飾的是人還是物.eg.Did you go to the talk ○ the famous cartoonist gave at your school The cartoonist ○ we spoke to still uses pen and paper to make his drawings 在英語(yǔ)中,如果定語(yǔ)從句的引導(dǎo)詞在從句中作主語(yǔ)就不能省略,否則會(huì)造成結(jié)構(gòu)混亂,影響表達(dá).I've got a camera which has got his name on it.Perhaps it'll be a cartoon which has a happy ending.It tells the story of a monkey who leads a group of monkeys.eg.I'd love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist.He could make lessons that are usually boring more interesting.2.Exercises 1.Do the exercises 1.2.3 in WB.2.多項(xiàng)選擇.從下列ABCDE中選出符合題意的任意項(xiàng).A.which B.that C./ D.who E.whom(見(jiàn)附表)Blackboard Writing Design Attributive Clauses

The cartoons(which / that)I like have lots of jokes.在英語(yǔ)中,如果定語(yǔ)從句的引導(dǎo)詞在從句中作賓語(yǔ)就可以省略,無(wú)論從句修飾的是人還是物.eg.Did you go to the talk ○ the famous cartoonist gave at your school The cartoonist ○ we spoke to still uses pen and paper to make his drawings 在英語(yǔ)中,如果定語(yǔ)從句的引導(dǎo)詞在從句中作主語(yǔ)就不能省略,否則會(huì)造成結(jié)構(gòu)混亂,影響表達(dá).eg.I'd love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist.He could make lessons that are usually boring more interesting.Self-reflection Appendixes/Unit 1 1.But it's no laughing matter.但這不是開(kāi)玩笑的事情.表示的否定強(qiáng)度比 Not a laughing matter.強(qiáng)得多.2.have a word with sb.和某人說(shuō)句話(huà).等于to talk to some one for a short time.a 與談話(huà)中說(shuō)了多少?zèng)]有任何關(guān)系.比較:have words with sb.與某人吵架.3.That's a smart idea!等于That's a good idea.4.be in deep trouble.處于大麻煩/險(xiǎn)境中.Exercises: 根據(jù)給出的漢語(yǔ)意思或首字母提示完成下列各題.The story has a happy ending(結(jié)局).三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

We feel that life is no laughing matter(開(kāi)玩笑的事情).This isn't one of those cartoons(卡通)which make you laugh.Come here and I have a word with you.Did you have any trouble finding your way here You can imagine how surprised I was.Appendixes/Unit 2 1.fan club 影迷俱樂(lè)部

2.orange-and-white 橙白相間的 black-and-white 黑白相間的 合成詞作定語(yǔ) 3.win the heart of sb.贏得某人的心 4.in heaven 在天宮里

5.make a mess 搞得亂七八糟 see a mess 看到狼籍一片 mess 一般以單數(shù)形式出現(xiàn), e.g.You are really a mess!你臟透了!What a mess!真亂!

Your room is in a mess!你的房間亂七八糟的.6.favourite adj.喜愛(ài)的,n.特別喜歡的人或物 7.ever since 自從,從那時(shí)到現(xiàn)在,從??開(kāi)始

e.g.She has been rich, ever since she met a good man.8.translate into 翻譯成?,translate sth.from a language into another language.9.a series of 一系列 series的單數(shù)復(fù)數(shù)一致

Appendixes/Unit 3 定語(yǔ)從句中引導(dǎo)詞/關(guān)系詞的省略問(wèn)題.如果引導(dǎo)詞/關(guān)系詞在從句中作賓語(yǔ)成份可以省去引導(dǎo)詞/關(guān)系詞,無(wú)論從句修飾的是人還是物.但是作主語(yǔ)不可省,否則會(huì)造成結(jié)構(gòu)混亂.which 指物可作主語(yǔ)和賓語(yǔ),that 指人指物可作主語(yǔ)和賓語(yǔ),who 指人在正式語(yǔ)體中只作主語(yǔ),whom 指人做賓語(yǔ),但在非正式語(yǔ)體里界who 也可作賓語(yǔ).關(guān)系代詞 先行詞

在從句中的作用 who 指人 做主語(yǔ) whom 指人 做賓語(yǔ) that 指人或物 做主語(yǔ)或賓語(yǔ) which 指物

做主語(yǔ)或賓語(yǔ)

The cartoons(that/which)I like have lots of jokes.I like the teacher who teaches me English this term.在日?？谡Z(yǔ)中,在定語(yǔ)從句中作賓語(yǔ)的引導(dǎo)詞往往被省略,但在較正式的文字中則較少省略.三岔口初級(jí)中學(xué)英語(yǔ)電子教案

九年級(jí)

第 ５ 冊(cè)

Exercises: 不定項(xiàng)選擇.從下列ABCDE中選出符合題意的任意項(xiàng).A.which B.that C./ D.who E.whom 1.It is the third time ______you have made the same mistake.2.The factory _______we'll visit next week is not far from here.3.Do you know the man ________ I spoke to

4.Can you lend me the book ______you talked about the other day 5.The engineer ________my father works with is about 50 years old.6.That is the office ______Lincoln once worked in.7.All the apples _______fell down from the tree were eaten up by the pigs.8.The place__________interested me most was the Children's Palace.9.The number of the people _______own cars is increasing.Module 10 Fitness

一、教學(xué)目標(biāo)

1、語(yǔ)言知識(shí)目標(biāo) 語(yǔ)音 詞匯 朗讀中停頓注意句群

ache exercise weight interest sugar tasty menu behave persuade ban educate typical

diet

fitness running weight lifting unlikely chip pasta cooking disadvantage advertise 詞組 give up

bump into

語(yǔ)法 功能 話(huà)題 whose引導(dǎo)的定語(yǔ)從句

能用whose定語(yǔ)從句來(lái)描述人 以“健康”為話(huà)題。

2、語(yǔ)言技能目標(biāo)

聽(tīng) 能聽(tīng)懂用包含所學(xué)的定語(yǔ)從句的口頭表述，詢(xún)問(wèn)及其回應(yīng)的聽(tīng)力材料。

說(shuō) 能在語(yǔ)境中流利說(shuō)出本模塊的生詞，能說(shuō)一些有whose的定語(yǔ)從句 讀 能讀懂有關(guān)健康體育活動(dòng)與飲食的短文，理解閱讀材料中定語(yǔ)從句所表達(dá)的語(yǔ)義。進(jìn)行一定閱讀技能訓(xùn)練。

寫(xiě) 能寫(xiě)包含所學(xué)定語(yǔ)從句的句子，能結(jié)合實(shí)際寫(xiě)改善飲食的文章 演示與表達(dá) 能向同伴或全班講述如何保持健康，并提出合理建議

3、學(xué)習(xí)策略目標(biāo)

自主學(xué)習(xí)、有效交際、信息處理、英語(yǔ)思維能力。認(rèn)知 調(diào)控 交際 資源 自學(xué) 策略 合作 學(xué)習(xí)策略 互相學(xué)習(xí)，取長(zhǎng)補(bǔ)短，注意學(xué)習(xí)策略共享，將自己所搜集的信息與其他同學(xué)共享。聯(lián)系、歸納等技能。觀察并歸納的有Whose的定語(yǔ)從句結(jié)構(gòu)，提高自學(xué)能力。從同伴處得到反饋，對(duì)自己在敘述及寫(xiě)作中的錯(cuò)誤進(jìn)行修改。學(xué)習(xí)運(yùn)用恰當(dāng)詞語(yǔ)，句子描述如何保持健康。

通過(guò)其他資源獲取更多有關(guān)“健康”的英語(yǔ)材料。

培養(yǎng)在詞語(yǔ)與相應(yīng)事物之間建立聯(lián)想的習(xí)慣，形成話(huà)題聯(lián)想的習(xí)慣。

第五篇：外研版四年級(jí)英語(yǔ)上冊(cè)教學(xué)計(jì)劃

四年級(jí)英語(yǔ)上冊(cè)教學(xué)計(jì)劃

一、指導(dǎo)思想

國(guó)家《英語(yǔ)課程標(biāo)準(zhǔn)》明確指出：提倡任務(wù)型教學(xué)模式，把綜合語(yǔ)言運(yùn)用能力的培養(yǎng)落實(shí)在教學(xué)過(guò)程中，倡導(dǎo)體驗(yàn)、實(shí)踐、參與、交流和合作的學(xué)習(xí)方式，實(shí)現(xiàn)任務(wù)的目標(biāo)，感受成功，強(qiáng)調(diào)學(xué)生能用英語(yǔ)做事情。

二、學(xué)情分析

本學(xué)期我擔(dān)任學(xué)校的四年級(jí)英語(yǔ)，共有學(xué)生43人。通過(guò)三年級(jí)一年的學(xué)習(xí)，學(xué)生們也有了一定的基礎(chǔ)，本學(xué)期可以在此基礎(chǔ)上進(jìn)行教學(xué)。四年級(jí)的孩子在整體上比較活躍，沉不下心，容易起哄，在此后的課堂中，針對(duì)此現(xiàn)象要嚴(yán)加管理，進(jìn)行紀(jì)律約束。作為四年級(jí)的老師，不僅要調(diào)動(dòng)學(xué)生的積極性，活躍課堂，有效地完成教學(xué)任務(wù)，還要注重對(duì)學(xué)生綜合能力的培養(yǎng)，尤其是要對(duì)學(xué)生的思維能力，分析能力和理解能力進(jìn)行更高層次的提高。

三、教材分析

本學(xué)期繼續(xù)沿用外研版四年級(jí)教材，總共10個(gè)模塊：

Module1是在復(fù)習(xí)之前學(xué)過(guò)的方位介詞的基礎(chǔ)上學(xué)習(xí)地方名稱(chēng)，以及新的方位詞beside, next to, up, down, left, right.重點(diǎn)句型：Excuse me, where is the ……? 能夠?qū)W會(huì)問(wèn)路或?yàn)樗酥嘎?，并?yīng)用在生活中。

Module2是學(xué)習(xí)小學(xué)英語(yǔ)四年級(jí)入門(mén)語(yǔ)法——現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)，理解語(yǔ)法知識(shí)點(diǎn)，會(huì)用現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)談?wù)搱D片上正在發(fā)生的事情，詢(xún)問(wèn)并講述正在發(fā)生的事情。復(fù)習(xí)學(xué)過(guò)的動(dòng)詞，并掌握動(dòng)詞變?yōu)閯?dòng)名詞的變化規(guī)則。

Module3是繼續(xù)學(xué)習(xí)be動(dòng)詞與人稱(chēng)的搭配在現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)中的用法，用現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)談?wù)撊藗冊(cè)诠珗@中的活動(dòng)，描述正在發(fā)生的行為或動(dòng)作，嘗試看圖說(shuō)話(huà)，正確使用句型。

Module4是學(xué)習(xí)食物及購(gòu)物，復(fù)習(xí)之前學(xué)過(guò)的食物，了解典型的食品和飲料名稱(chēng)，掌握重點(diǎn)句型Do you want some……?肯定回答有：Yes, please.否定回答是：No, thanks.了解中西方的回答情況，嘗試自編購(gòu)物對(duì)話(huà)。

Module5是學(xué)習(xí)用can表能力引導(dǎo)的一般疑問(wèn)句，繼續(xù)學(xué)習(xí)一些動(dòng)詞，句型有：Can you ……?后加動(dòng)詞原形，肯定回答有：Yes, I can.否定回答有：No, I cannot.通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)激發(fā)學(xué)生的學(xué)習(xí)欲望。Module6是繼續(xù)學(xué)習(xí)用can引導(dǎo)的一般疑問(wèn)句，但意味著“請(qǐng)求”，請(qǐng)求獲得，允許或拒絕，句型有：Can I have some……?肯/否定回答有：Yes, you can./ Sorry, you cannot.了解英語(yǔ)國(guó)家和中國(guó)的主要食物和節(jié)日，表達(dá)祝愿，復(fù)習(xí)食物。

Module7是結(jié)合現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)用“There be ……”來(lái)描述圖片上的情景，復(fù)習(xí)蔬菜、水果、動(dòng)物、五官類(lèi)單詞。了解單復(fù)數(shù)概念，單數(shù)有“There is ……”，復(fù)數(shù)用“There are……”。將所學(xué)句型應(yīng)用到生活當(dāng)中。

Module8是學(xué)習(xí)新的語(yǔ)法：be going to結(jié)構(gòu)，講述自己的計(jì)劃和即將發(fā)生的事情，即一般將來(lái)時(shí)。通過(guò)課文的學(xué)習(xí)，復(fù)習(xí)英語(yǔ)中最簡(jiǎn)單的稱(chēng)謂語(yǔ)和問(wèn)候語(yǔ)，學(xué)習(xí)be going to中動(dòng)詞規(guī)則，注意哪些時(shí)間詞表示一般將來(lái)時(shí)。

Module9是學(xué)習(xí)將來(lái)時(shí)的一般疑問(wèn)句，句型有：Are you going to……?學(xué)習(xí)制定計(jì)劃，學(xué)習(xí)關(guān)于體育活動(dòng)類(lèi)的單詞、詞語(yǔ)。

Module10是學(xué)習(xí)表達(dá)節(jié)日問(wèn)候，并描述過(guò)節(jié)時(shí)的風(fēng)俗習(xí)慣，復(fù)習(xí)英語(yǔ)國(guó)家和中國(guó)的節(jié)日及食物。

四、教學(xué)目標(biāo)

1、培養(yǎng)學(xué)生自主學(xué)習(xí)的興趣，讓學(xué)生主動(dòng)參與英語(yǔ)活動(dòng)。

2、培養(yǎng)學(xué)生英語(yǔ)思維，能夠根據(jù)老師的指令做出快速反應(yīng)。

3、勤記課本單詞，熟讀課文，發(fā)音準(zhǔn)確。

4、將所學(xué)知識(shí)應(yīng)用到生活中，大膽說(shuō)英語(yǔ)。

5、多做習(xí)題，善于總結(jié)，培養(yǎng)興趣的同時(shí)，測(cè)試也能有好成績(jī)。

五、重、難點(diǎn)解析

1、復(fù)習(xí)一般將來(lái)時(shí)的運(yùn)用；

2、復(fù)習(xí)鞏固過(guò)去時(shí)；

3、復(fù)習(xí)現(xiàn)在進(jìn)行時(shí)；

4、復(fù)習(xí)鞏固特殊疑問(wèn)句：（1）What do you want to eat?(2)What are you doing?(3)What are they doing?(4)Who are they talking about?

5、繼續(xù)學(xué)習(xí)動(dòng)詞的過(guò)去時(shí)態(tài)；

6、學(xué)習(xí)簡(jiǎn)單的一般將來(lái)時(shí)態(tài)的表示方法。

六、教學(xué)方法

1、提倡任務(wù)型教學(xué)，讓學(xué)生學(xué)以致用。在教學(xué)中，根據(jù)教學(xué)內(nèi)容為學(xué)生設(shè)計(jì)一些貼近學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)和生活實(shí)際的任務(wù)，培養(yǎng)學(xué)生對(duì)語(yǔ)言的支配感。

2、盡可能為學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)語(yǔ)言創(chuàng)造情境。利用圖片、模型、實(shí)物、簡(jiǎn)筆畫(huà)等教具，利用自己的手勢(shì)、動(dòng)作、表情等體態(tài)，利用課件、錄音、錄像等現(xiàn)代教學(xué)設(shè)備，使英語(yǔ)教學(xué)變得生動(dòng)形象，為英語(yǔ)教學(xué)提供各種教學(xué)語(yǔ)境和真實(shí)的交際場(chǎng)合，營(yíng)造英語(yǔ)交際情境和氣氛。

3、實(shí)施趣味性教學(xué)，精心設(shè)計(jì)游戲、競(jìng)賽等活動(dòng)，使教學(xué)情趣化，給學(xué)生以愉快的情緒體驗(yàn)，充分調(diào)動(dòng)學(xué)生的積極性，促使學(xué)生向著目標(biāo)不斷進(jìn)取。